2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)

高一英语课件

发布时间： 2024.03.09

2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)。

资料可以指人事物的相关多类信息、情报。当我们的学习任务遇到困难时，往往都需要参考资料。资料可以帮助我们更高效地完成各项工作。那么，你知道优秀的资料是怎样的呢？以下是由小编为你整理的《2024高一英语课件(精品十五篇)》，仅供参考，我们来看看吧！

高一英语课件(篇1)

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件(篇2)

【知识网络】

一、重点词汇与短语

1．add用法小结：

（1）的基本意思是“增加、添加，加上”，一般作及物动词，后接名词、数词等作宾语。例如：

Add more hot water to the soup – it is too salty. 在汤里多加点热水 – 太咸了。

Add a few more names of laborers to the list.

名单上再加上几个工人的名字。

（2）表示“加；加起来”的意思。

例如：

If you add 4 to 3， you get 7. 四加三得七。

Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。

（3）表示“补充说；又说”。

例如：

I should add that we are very pleased. 我要补充的是我们非常高兴。

I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.

我还要补充说一下,我们对测试结果表示满意。

（4）常用短语：

●add something to something: add fuel to the fire: 火上浇油

●add up/together: 加算；合计He wrote down the weight of each stone and then added up/together all the weights.

他把每一块石头的重量记下来，然后把所有的重量加在一起。

The various facts in their report just don't add up.

他们报告中的各方面材料根本串不起来。

●add to: 增加

Our coming added to your trouble. 我们的到来给你们增加了麻烦。

●add up to：总计达到…，总和为…，总数达…：

His debts added up to 40,000 dollars. 他的债务总计达到40，000美圆。

2．remind用法小结：remind作为及物动词，常与of, to infinitive, that连用，意思是“使想起；使记起；提醒”。

例如：

Remind me to write to Mother. (后接somebody to do something )

提醒我给妈妈写信。

This reminds me of last year. (后接somebody + of + something)

这使我想起去年的事。

In case I forget, please remind me about it. （后接somebody + about + something）

请提醒我一下，以免我忘记。

He reminded me that I had done it before. （后接that从句）

他使我想起我以前做过了。

3．wonder用法小结：

（1）wonder既可以作及物动词，也可以作不及物动词使用。常与at, that连用，意思是“觉得奇怪；惊奇；纳闷；想知道”。

例如：

I wonder. In England, each man speaks a different language.

我感到十分惊奇,在英国每个人都说着一种语言。

I wonder at his rudeness. 我对他的粗鲁感到奇怪。

He wondered why people built ugly homes, when they could have beautiful ones.

他很奇怪为什么人们本可以造出漂亮的房屋,而偏偏建造出丑陋的房子来。

He was just wondering how to do it. 他只是想知道怎么做这个。

Ted wondered why he was wanted by the police, but he went to the station yesterday.

特德不知道为什么警察局要他去,但昨天他去了。

I wonder why James is always late for school.

我想知道为什么詹姆斯上学总是迟到。

（2）wonder还可以作名词，意思是“惊奇；惊叹；奇观；壮举；奇才”。

例如：

The boy looked at the stranger in wonder.

那个男孩惊奇地看着那个陌生人。

They were filled with wonder when they saw the spaceship.

当他们看到宇宙飞船时，他们非常惊奇。

He has visited the seven wonders of the world. 世界七大奇观他都参观过了。

He's a wonder. 他是个奇才。

（3）习惯用语：

● It's a wonder：难得；奇怪的是

It's a wonder you recognized me. 难得你还认得我。

● (It's) no wonder 难怪；并不奇怪；当然

No wonder he is not hungry; he has been eating sweets all day.

难怪他不饿，他整天在吃糖果。

二、词义辨析

1．last, latest 与newest的区别：

（1）last表示“最后的，刚刚过去的；紧接前面的”，强调顺序。

例如：

She was the last to arrive. 她是最后到的。

He was the very last to leave the office. 他是最后一个离开办公室的。

He would be the last man to do such foolish things. 他决不会干这种蠢事。

He won the last election. 上次选举他获胜了。

（2）latest意思是“最新的，最晚的，最近的”。

例如：

Everyone wants to read the latest news, no one wants yesterday’s newspaper.

人人都想读到最新的消息，没有人想要读昨天的报纸。

（3）newest表示“最新的”，它是与旧“old”相对的。

例如：

The man put on his newest clothes to attend the party.

那个人穿上最新的衣服去参加晚会。

2．whatever 与no matter what的区别：

两者都表示“无论什么，”但是在用法上有所区别：whatever既可以引导让步状语从句，又可以引导名词性从句；而no matter what只能引导让步状语从句。

例如：

No matter what you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）

=Whatever you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）

无论你们说什么，我还是要自己做这件事。

Whatever we said, he'd disagree. （让步状语从句）

College students are seen doing whatever work they can find. （宾语从句）

我们可以看到,只要有工作,大学生们什么都干。

Do whatever she tells you and you'll have peace. （宾语从句）

她叫你干什么你就干什么,那你就太平了。

Whatever happens, the first important thing is to keep cool. （让步状语从句）

不管发生什么事,头等重要的是保持冷静。

You may do whatever you want to do. （宾语从句）

无论你想做什么事，你都可以做。

Whatever we do is our own business. （主语从句）

无论我们做什么，那是我们自己的事。

三、重点句型

1．Cellphones, or mobile phones, make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

此句中，动词make为使役动词，后面接复合宾语，此句的it为形式宾语。

再如：

We found it important to complete our task on time.

我们发现按时完成任务很重要。

2．I don’t dare to use the phones in school, because they will take it away from me.

此句中的dare为行为动词，后面要接带to的不定式，但在口语中，有时to也省略；dare如果作情态动词，则后面一定直接接动词原形，且无人称、数、格的变化。

例如：

He dare not drive the care on expressways, as all the other cars are going so fast. （情态动词，注意其形式）

他不敢在高速公路上开车，因为所有其它的车都跑得那么快。

I didn’t dare (to) do it in class because the teacher might scold me. （及物动词，注意to的问题）

我不敢在课上做这件事，因为老师会训我。

3．Some parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

此句的worry后面接宾语从句。Worry后面还可以接about 构成词组，表示“对…担心”，强调动作；另外，词组be worried about 也表示“对…担心”，强调状态。

再如：

Where have you been? We’ve been worried about you.

你去哪儿了？我们一直都在为你担心。

Parents always worry about their children.

父母总是为自己的孩子担心。

【考点透视考例精析】

[考点] 考查谓语动词被动语态的用法。

[考例1] --Have you moved into the new house?

--Not, yet, the rooms _______________.

A．are being painted B．are painting

C．are painted D．are being painting

[解析] A 本句的意思是“因为新房子正在粉刷，所以我还没有搬进去”。用现在进行时的被动语态。

[拓展] 除了现在进行时的被动语态，过去进行时的被动语态也是值得注意的一点。

例如：

The lost children were last seen playing by the side of the river.

最后有人看见那些失踪的孩子在河边玩。

[考点] 介词短语的语义辨析。

[考例2] I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ___________.

A．at last B．in case C．once again D．in time

[解析] B 本句前面的分句已经说明“主语认为自己不需要钱”，所以but后的分句说明“带上点钱以防万一”。

[拓展] in case与in case of的用法要注意。再如：

Take an umbrella with you in case it rains.

随手带把伞以防天下雨。

In case of danger he was always standing in front of me.

在危机时刻他总是站在我前面。

In case of fire, you should always stay calm.

在发生火灾的时候，你应该总是保持镇定。

[考点] 考查turn构成的词组的用法。

[考例3] The children are always _________ practicing playing football when they have PE lessons.

A．taking turns B．by turns C．in turns D．at turns

[解析] A 本句的空白处缺少谓语。因而用take turns doing something结构，意思是“轮流做某事”；by turns和in turn都可以表示“轮流做某事”，但都是介词短语，只能作状语。

[考点] 考察动词的时态。

[考例4] Mr. Smith searched the Internet for nearly two hours before he _________.

A．was decided well B．had made a good decision

C．made a good decision D．has made up his mind

[解析] C 本句的主句用了一般过去时态，因此也决定了从句的时态。排除了B、D项；make up one’s mind意思是“做出决定”，但是时态不对。

【基础演练】

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．As a great scientist, he is famous t___________ the world.

2． Please r________ me of my interview with Mr. Smith again tomorrow.

3．Those small factories are causing a lot of e_____________ pollution with all their noise and smoke.

4． They've r__________ the prices in the shop, so it's a good time to buy.

5． Jane o_________ the party. She a bought the food and drinks and asked people to come .

6． I made an ___________ (约定) to see the doctor yesterday.

7． She is a very ________________(有吸引力的) girl. Everyone likes her.

8． As a reporter, he is very _____________(成功).

9． They took strong _________（措施）against dangerous drivers.

10． The patient was asked to ring the bell in an ____________(紧急情况).

二、单项填空：

1．The coat ________ you well, but I don’t think the color _________ you.

A．dress, suits B．is fit for, fits on C．fits, suits D．is dressed, fits

2．She’s a bit shy and __________ answer teacher’s questions in class.

A．not dare to B．dare not to C．doesn’t dare D．dares not

3．Imagine that you are one of the volunteers __________ the foreigners, what should you do?

A．to choose serving B．choose to serve

C．choosing serving D．chosen to serve

4．Because of human being’s keeping killing, some kinds of animals are __________.

A．in danger of B．endangered C．dangerous D．in endanger

5．Someone called up in the middle of the night, but they hung up _________ I could answer the phone.

A．as B．since C．until D．before

6．It is generally considered unwise to give a child __________ he or she wants.

A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever

7．The police found that the house _________ and a lot of things _____________.

A．has broken into, has been stolen B．had broken into, had been stolen

C．has been broken into, stolen D．had been broken into, stolen

8．What surprised me was not what he said but ___________ he said it.

A．in the way B．in the way that C．the way D．the way which

9．Our guests were expected at 8 o’clock, but they didn’t ________ till 8:30.

A．turn on B．turn up C．turn over D．turn down

10．Mr. Li made up his mind to devote all he could _______ his oral English.

A．improve B．to improve C．improving D．to improving

【能力拓展】

阅读理解：

When a rather dirty, poorly-dressed person kneels at your feet and puts out his hands to beg for a few coins, do you hurry on, not knowing what to do, or do you feel sad and hurriedly hand over some money? What should our attitude to beggars be? There can’t be no question that the world is full of terrible sad stories. It must be terrible to have no idea where our next meal is going to come from. It seems cruel not to give some money to beggars..

Certainly, most of the world’s great religions order us to be open-hearted and share what we have with those less fortunate than ourselves. But has the world changed? Maybe what was morally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea. Quite a few people will not give to beggars. Let us look at their arguments.

First, some believe that many city beggars dress up on purpose to look pitiable and actually make a good living from begging. Giving to beggars only encourages this sort of evil(恶行). Secondly, there is the opinion that there is no real excuse for begging. One might be poor, but that is no reason for losing one’s sense of pride and self-dependence..

Related to this in the opinion that the problem should be dealt with by the government rather than ordinary people . Some people think beggars should go to the local government department and receive help.

It is hard to come to any final conclusion; there are various cases and we must deal with them differently. A few coins can save a life in some situations, and even if the money is wasted, that does not take away the moral goodness of the giver.

1．What is mainly discussed in the passage?

A．Moral deeds of people. B．Religious activities of the church.

C． Moral goodness of the giver D．Arguments on giving to beggars.

2．What can we infer from the sentence “But has the world changed?” in the second paragraph?

A．People no longer know who was morally right in the past.

B．Some people will not do what was morally right in the past.

C．We don’t meet with those who need help any more.

D．Now it is the government’s duty to help the beggars.

3．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?

A．Some people dress up to pretend to be beggars.

B．Some beggars want money to help their children go to school.

C．Some beggars use the money to buy drugs.

D．Some beggars have no excuse for begging.

4．In the last paragraph, the writer thinks that it is hard to come to any final conclusion, because ___________.

A. the cases can be so different B. there are so many beggars

C. there is so much money wasted D. there are so many different arguments

参考答案

高一部分

Units 9-10 (B1)

基础演练

一、1．throughout 2．remind 3．environmental 4．reduced 5．organized 6．appointment 7．attractive 8．successful 9．measures 10．emergency

二、1-5 CCDBD 6-10 BDCBD

能力拓展

1-4 DBBA

1. D 这是一个主旨题。本篇文章主要讨论了是否给乞丐钱的观点。

2．B 这是一个细节推断题。根据第二段的句子“Maybe what was mortally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea.”可知答案。

3．B 这是个判断正误题。第三段讲述了“假装扮成乞丐”、“用乞讨来的钱买毒品”、“没有行乞的理由”。只有B项（乞讨来的钱送孩子去上学）没有在文章中提到。

4．A 这是一个细节题。原因在于作者说“there are various cases and we must deal with them differently”。说明作者是想告诉我们情况是各种各样的。

高一英语课件(篇3)

示范教案一(Unit13Healthy eating 4th)

The Fourth Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.

2.Review how to use some Modal verbs to give advice or opinion about something.

3.Let students know how to write recipes for their favourite dishes by reading“SNACKS”and two examples of recipes.

Teaching Important Points:

1.How to master Modal verbs-had better(not),should(not),ought(not)to.

2.How to let the students understand the text“SNACKS”better and learn to write a recipe.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to improve the students' integrating skills.

Teaching Methods:

1.Asking-and-answering activity to go through the reading material.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a projector 2.the blackboard

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ. Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ. Revision

T:Yesterday we learned the grammar-Modal verbs:had better,should,ought to and their negative forms.We know we can use them if we give advice or opinion about something.And we also know“had better”is less strong than“should”or“ought to”.Now let's do some exercises to see if you have mastered them.Look at the screen.

(Show the following on the screen.)

Translate the following into English.

1.你最好休息。

2.你最好不要吃不熟的水果。

3.对水果你应该认真些。

4.你不应该吃那么多垃圾食品。

5.你应该更努力地学习，取得更大的成绩。

T:You are given five minutes to translate them.Then I'll ask some of you to read your translation.

高一英语课件(篇4)

作者：贺莉自：本站原创点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加，相加，补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏；需要

[C] 需要得东西；必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束；（关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

高一英语课件(篇5)

【知识网络】

一、重点词汇与短语

1．recognize的用法小结：

（1）to know again (somebody or something ) that one has seen (or heard, etc) before 认出

I recognized Peter although I hadn't seen him for 10 years.

虽然我有没看到彼得了，但我认出了他。

I don't recognize this word -- what does it mean?

我不认识这个单词，它的意思是什么？

Many fail to recognize that all these things are in danger of denied.

许多人没有看到这一切正处于失去的危险之中。

（2）to accept as a fact; to admit承认；认可常用于以下结构：

recognize + object

recognize somebody to do something

recognize somebody as …

recognize + that从句

to recognize a new government

承认一个新政府

We all recognize him to be clever.

我们都承认他是非常聪明的。

We recognize that country as an independent state.

我们承认那个国家是一个独立的国家。

He didn’t recognize that he was wrong.

他不承认他错了。

（3）be prepared to admit or be aware of (something.); realize. 认清（某事）；认识到

He recognized his lack of qualifications/that he was not qualified for the post.

他认识到自己不够条件/没有资格担任那个职务。

2．marry的用法小结：表示“ 结婚；娶；嫁”的意思。

（1）marry为及物动词，宾语是somebody，不能加任何介词；而且是瞬时动词，不能与一段时间连用。

例如：

I am going to marry John. 我要和约翰结婚了。

（2）词组 somebody be married to somebody表示已婚的状态，这时可以与一段时间连用。例如：

Mary has been married to John for two years. 玛丽与约翰已结婚两年了。

（3）词组somebody get married to somebody表示的是瞬间的动作，不可与一段时间连用。

She got married to him last year. 她去年与他结婚了。

（4）词组 marry somebody to somebody: 使结婚；嫁（女）;把…嫁给…

He married his daughter to a businessman. 他把女儿嫁给了一个商人。

（5）主持…婚礼

The priest married them. 牧师主持他们的婚礼。

（6）“嫁给一个有钱人”可以有以下说法：

marry a man with a lot of money

marry a rich man

marry a fortune

marry well

3．worth的用法小结：

（1）后面跟表示“钱”的名词，意思是“值多少钱”。

例如：

How much is this bicycle worth? It's worth ￡50.

这辆自行车值多少钱？值50英磅。

（2）“值得…的”，可以用-doing这种主动形式表示被动的意义。

例如：

This book is worth reading. 这本书值得读。

This watch is worth repairing. 这只表值得修理。

（3）需要加强语气时，worth前可以用well，但不可以用very。

例如：

The film is very exciting. It is well worth seeing again.

这部电影很令人振奋。很值得再看一遍。

（4）it可以作be worth的形式主语。

It isn’t worth getting angry with him.

=He is not worth getting angry with.

犯不上跟他生气。

注意：（1）worthy后面要用“介词of + 动词-ing形式的被动式”或者“不定式的被动式”，表示“值得…的”。

例如：

This novel is worthy of being read a second time. = This novel is worthy to be read a second time. （这本小说值得再看一遍。）

（2）worthwhile也表示“值得…的”。要注意此结构：

It is worthwhile reading the novel a second time. ( 这本小说值得再读一遍 )

4．“祈使句＋ and /then /or /otherwise + 陈述句”结构的用法：

在此结构中，前两个起连接作用的词表示顺接关系，后两个表示逆接关系；前面的祈使句相当于一个条件状语从句，而陈述句表示结果；可以转换为带有条件状语从句的复合句；转换时要注意连接词的使用。

例如：

Work harder and/then you will succeed in your studies. （注意：此句中and和then只能用一个，不能一起使用。）

=If you work harder, you’ll succeed in your studies.

（如果你更加努力学习，在学习方面你就会成功。注意：and和then可以互换，只能用其中一个。）

Study hard, or/otherwise you’ll fail in your exams.

=If you don’t study hard, you’ll fail in your exams.

（如果你不刻苦学习，你就会考不及格。）

二、词义辨析

1．accept, receive与take的区别：

receive, accept, take这三个词都有“接受”的意思。

（1）receive表示被动地接受。

例如：

Then he smiled and told me I would receive an extra ￡100 a year!

后来他笑了，并且告诉我说，我将一年收到一百英镑的额外收入！

If you receive a request like this, you cannot fail to obey it!

如果你收到这样的一种请求，你不会不服从的！

A baby can only receive sense impressions, but it does not understand them.

婴儿只能接受感官方面的印象，而不能理解。

（2）accept总表示主动而且高兴地接受。

例如：

Please accept my apologies. 请接受我的歉意。

The villagers have told him that they will not accept the inn even if he gives it away.

村民们告诉他说，即使他把那小酒店白送给人家，也没有人会接受的。

She has received his present, but she will not accept it.

她收到了他的礼物，但她是不会接受的。

There is no accepted theory to explain the phenomenon.

没有公认的理论来解释这种现象。

（3）take所表示的接受包含着有人赠给的意思。

例如：

Did you take his advice? 你接受了他的建议了吗？

He takes anything he is given. 给他什么他就要什么。

（4）receive还表示“接待、接见”的意思。

例如：

The hotel is now open to receive guests. 这家旅馆现在开业接待客人了。

2．after all, above all, at all, in all

（1）after all: 置于句首时表示提醒对方注意，常翻译成“别忘了”；置于句末时表示“与预料的情况相反”。

例如：

Don’t be too strict with him. After all, he is only a child.

对他不要过于严格。别忘了，他还只是个孩子。

I thought I would fail in the last exam, but I passed, after all.

我原以为上次考试我会不及格，但是没有想到我竟然及格了。

（2）above all: 首先，重要的是。

例如：

Above all, I love taking a walk every evening.

首先，我喜欢每天晚上散步。

（3）at all:常用于否定句和疑问句，表示加强语气。常翻译成：“根本、丝毫”等。

例如：

I'm not at all sorry I came, I'm glad! 我来了一点也不遗憾，我很高兴。

There was nothing at all to eat. 根本就没有什么东西吃。

Are you at all worried about the forecast? 你对这项预报不担一点心吗？

（4）in all: 意思是“总计”。

例如：

There were twelve of us in all for dinner. 我们一共12人吃饭。

三、重点句型

1．I’d rather not tell you.

注意：somebody would rather do something表示“某人宁愿做某事”；它的否定句表示“某人还是别…”。

例如：

I would rather go there by bus. (我宁愿坐公共汽车去那里。)

I would rather not sit there doing nothing. (我不愿坐在那里什么都不做。)

2．on’t touch anything, unless your teacher tells you to.

unless引导的从句有时可以和if引导的否定条件句互换，此句可以改成：…, if your teacher doesn’t tell you to. 另外要注意句末的to后省略了touch something。

再如：

I won’t go with you unless you tell me who will be with us.

如果你不告诉我谁将和我们一起，我就不会和你一起去。

3．here’s no doubt that 100 years ago animal testing was cruel but today animals in experiments are very well taken of.

此句中There’s no doubt that…为固定句型，意思是“毫无疑问”。

再如：

There is no doubt that he is our model in work. 毫无疑问，他是我们工作中的模范。

四、语法复习

情态动词must, can/could, may/might表示推测、猜测、可能的用法。

1．表示对所发生的事情或情景作出“很肯定”的推测时，肯定式用must，否定式用can’t，意思是“一定，想必；不可能”。

例如：

The new term has just started. She must be very busy preparing her lessons.

新的学期刚刚开始。她现在一定是忙于备课。

They can’t be at home now. It is now 10 o’clock. They must be in the office.

他们现在不可能在家。现在是10点钟。他们一定在办公室。

2．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出较有可能的推测时用can，相当于“可能是、也许会、会”。

例如：

It can be true.

这可能是真的。

Watching TV for a long time can damage your eyes.

看电视的时间长有可能损伤你的视力。

3．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出“不太肯定”的推测时，用may/might/could，相当于“也许、有可能”。Might和could不是表示过去，它们和may一样，都表示“现在的推测”，但是语气较委婉，或者表示可能性更小一些。

例如：

George hasn’t come yet. He may/might/could busy today.

乔治还没有来。他今天可能忙。

I can’t see clearly. There may/might/could a person in the darkness.

我看不清楚。黑暗中可能有个人。

【考点透视考例精析】

[考点] 考查情态动词can的用法。

[考例1] How ______ you say that you really understand the whole story if you have covered only part of the article? （上海，29）

A．can B．must C．need D．may

[解析] A can用于疑问句或否定句中表示惊异、不相信等，意思是“可能、能够”。在此句中，can表示惊异的感情色彩。

[拓展] “can”表达一定的感情色彩的句子在口语中是很常见的。

再如：

How can you say that? After all, you are a student now, and you should study hard.

你怎么能够那么说？别忘了，你现在是个学生，你应该努力学习。

[考点] 考查表“发生”的词组的用法区别。

[考例2] An accident ___________ in the street. ____________ happened to me that I was on the spot.

A．took place, It B．happened, That C．happened, It D．broke out, That

[解析] C 本句牵扯到表示“发生”意义的词组的区别。Take place表示“必然、自然地发生”；happen表示“意外发生”；break out表示“（火、战争、瘟疫等）爆发”。从第二个句子的结构来看，that引导的从句为真正的主语，前面用形式宾语it来代替。所以选择答案C。

[考点] 本题考查推测结构的否定用法。

[考例3] –I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter.（NMET北京，31）

--It ________ true because there was little snow there.

A．may not be B．won’t be C．couldn’t be D．mustn’t be

[解析] C couldn’t be true表示“这件事不可能是真的”。“There was little snow”说明了原因。

[考点] 本题考查否定转移时反意疑问句的用法。

[考例4] Maybe you’ve made a mistake. I don’t think he knows you, _________?

A．don’t you B．do I C．does he D．doesn’t he

[解析] C I/we don’t think后面跟宾语从句时，出现了“否定转移”现象，其反意疑问句应该根据从句来变。

【基础演练】

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．They c_______ you just to get in the night club.

2．The operation p_______ a complete success.

3．The work is so important that you must be careful enough not to make any mistake. Even a small one may c______ you your job.

4．All schools are under the c_______ of the Ministry of Education.

5．He earned 200,000 dollars in only one month. Of course he was a s____________ businessman.

6．Sometimes a few words of c_____ to the one who has just failed may encourage him to stand up.

7．This new model is of high _________ （质量）and is not expensive either.

8．According to the weather report, the weather will ________（继续） fine till this weekend.

9．At the end of an hour's play the ________（优势） lay definitely with him.

10．I am ________（肯定） that I gave you his address.

二、单项填空：

1．Let’s keep to the point or we _______any decisions. (NMET I)

A． will never reach B．have never reached

C．never reach D．never reached

2．–Isn’t that Ann’s husomebodyand over there? (NMET 2004 I)

--No, it __________ be him. I’m sure he doesn’t wear glassed.

A．can’t B．must not C．won’t D．may not

3．The mayor of Beijing says that all construction work for the Beijing Olympics ________ by . (北京卷 2004)

A．has been completed B．has completed

C．will have been completed D．will have completed

4．–Who’s that speaking?

--Mathilde Loisel.

--Mathilde! Oh, yes. Sorry. I __________ your voice.

A．didn’t know B．don’t know C．didn’t recognize D．don’t recognize

5．Of all the books on the desk，________ is of any use for our study. [06 四川卷]

A．nothing B．no one C．neither D．none

6．Listen! There’s a lot of noise from next door. They _________ a party.

A．could have had B．must be having C．should have had D．can be having

7．“Put that away _________ it’s broken.” Mum said angrily when Johnny played with the precious vase.

A．unless B．before C．once D．until

8．______ in 1636, Harvard is one of the most famous universities in the United States.

A．Founded B．Founding C．Being founded D．It was founded

9．The police tried to find the _______ child. But without ________ luck, they didn’t find him.

A．lost, a B．missing, / C．losing, a D．missing, /

10．It started _______ and I was beginning _______ how important his decision was that I should take an umbrella.

A．to rain, to realize B．raining, realizing

C．raining, to realize D．to rain, realizing

【能力拓展】

完形填空：

George Pickens had been making a wish daily as a worker at Central Bank.

All over the country banks were being （1） . George thought, （2） this bank? Didn’t robbers hear of its four-million-dollar （3） ? Were they afraid of Mr. Ackerman, the old （4） guard, who hadn’t （5） his gun in twenty-two years?

Of course George had a(an) （6） for wanting the bank to be robbed. （7） , he couldn’t simply take bills that were under his （8） all day long. So he had thought of another （9） to get them. His plan was （10） . It went like this:

If Bank Robber A holds up Bank Teller B…

And if Bank Teller B gives Bank Robber A a certain sum of money…

What is to prevent Bank Teller B from （11） all the money left and （12） that it was taken away by Bank Robber A?

There were only one （13） . Where was Bank Robber A?

One morning George entered the bank. “Good morning, Mr Burrows,” he said （14） . The bank president said something in a （15） voice to George and went into his office.

At two o’clock Bank Robber A walked in. George （16） he was a bank robber. For one thing, he stole in. For another thing, he wore a mask(面罩).

“This is a holdup,” the man said （17） . He took a gun from his pocket. The （18） made a small sound. “You!” the bank robber said, “Lie down on the floor!” Mr Ackerman lay down. The robber stepped （19） to George’s cage.

“All right,” he said. “Hand it over.”

“Yes, sir,” George reached into his drawer and took all the bills from the top part close to six thousand dollars. He passed them through the window. The robber took them, put them into his pocket, and （20） to leave.

Then, while everyone watched Bank Robber A, Bank Teller B calmly lifted off the top part of the drawer and got the bills from the bottom part into his pockets.

1． A．repaired B．broken C．robbed D．built

2． A．Why not B．What about C．How about D．How is

3． A．money B．capital C．note D．bill

4． A．door B．body C．safety D．bank

5． A. pulled out B．got C．carried out D．kept

6． A. chance B．eason C．excuse D．time

7． A．Of all B．In all C．Above all D．After all

8． A．hands B．desks C．drawer D．control

9． A．man B．day C．way D．robber

10． A． perfect B．complete C．easy D．simple

11． A．robbing B．stealing C．keeping D．taking

12． A．telling B．thinking C．insisting D．imagining

13． A．secret B．problem C．thing D．puzzle

14．A．cheerfully B．calmly C．anxiously D．eagerly

15． A．loud B．low C．big D．worrying

16． A．trusted B．recognized C．supposed D．knew

17． A．angrily B．roughly C．firmly D．politely

18． A．robber B．manager C．guard D．customer

19． A．on B．above C．through D．over

20． A．turned B．decided C．signed D．drew

参考答案

高一部分

Units 15-16 (B1)

基础演练

一、1．charged 2．proved 3．cost 4．control 5．successful 6．comfort 7．quality 8．continue 9．advantage 10．positive

二、1-5 AACCA 6-10 BBABA

能力拓展

参考答案与解析：

1-5 CABDD 6-10 BDACD 11-15 CCBAB 16-20 DBCDA

1．C 从全文看来，整篇围绕着抢银行而展开， A. repair修理；B. “破坏”；D. build，建立，均不合题意。

2．A George作为Central Bank的一个员工，所惊奇的是在全国的银行都被抢劫时，为什么独独他所在的银行没有被抢。

3．B capital “资本，资金”，与题意相符。

4．D 在银行，明显为 bank guard，与前文一直提到的rob相照应。

5．A pull out “掏出，拔掉”。这家银行没有被抢劫，难道是因为他们害怕这个二十年没有掏出枪的老保安？

6．B reason 原因；上文说George想让银行被抢，下文便介绍他这种想法出现的原因。

7．D after all “毕竟”； B. in all 总计；C. above all “首先”。George 想得到所有的钱，显然是不可能的，表示退一步来说的，只有选择D。

8．A under one’s hand “在某人指示下，受某人支配、掌握”。

8．C 靠正常工资难以满足George，所以他想到另一条获得大钱的方法。所以是another way。

10．D 从后面的意思看，他的计划应该是“simple”。

11．C “keep something + done”“使…处于某种情况下”。

12．C insist“坚持”，表示强调。

13． B “万事俱备，只欠东风”。George所考虑的步骤有一个仅有的“问题”，即“Where was Bank Robber A?”

14．A cheerfully “欢悦地，高兴地”，与George当时的心情相配，他考虑了整个计划，想着马上就能实现多钱的梦想，自然高兴异常。

15．B in a low voice“以极低的声音”。

16．D 从下文，那个人破门而入，并戴着面罩，他“知道”是个robber，是断定。

17．B roughly“粗鲁地，粗暴地”，正符合robber的身份，符合语言环境。

18．C 显然与robber相对的，guard的作用突显出来。

19．D step over to 表示动作的趋向。

20．A turn to “转身”。Robber抢了钱，肯定是转身离开，扬长而去。

高一英语课件(篇6)

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件(篇7)

on Australia’s famous beaches 在澳大利亚著名的海滩上

explore the amazing Brazilian rainforest 探索令人惊异的巴西雨林

6. think of想到, 考虑;

8. be busy doing sth忙于做…

14. my supplies of food and water 水和食物的供给

18. can’t wait to do sth. 等不及做某事

27. remember to boil the water 记得去烧开水

34. three pieces of information 三条信息

35. be filled with the wonders of nature 充满了大自然的奇迹

36. at the foot of the mountain 在山脚

45. in perfect harmony with协调一致; 相配

1. on Australia’s famous beaches

_________________________________

2. explore the amazing Brazilian rainforest

_________________________________

3. in detail _________________________

4. go travelling _____________________

5. challenge yourself _____________________

6. think of _____________________

7. so long _____________________

8. be busy doing sth____________________

9. go to university _____________________

10.through the Sahara _____________________

11. in case_____________________

12. take six days _____________________

13. in advance_____________________

14. my supplies of food and water

15. even though _____________________

16. up close _____________________

17. make sure that_____________________

18. can’t wait to do sth.

19. of one’s own _____________________

20. look forward to _____________________

21. it is worth doing _____________________

22. take extra clothes _____________________

23. remind sb. of sth. _____________________

24. make a fire _____________________

25. lose one’s way _____________________

26. in the open air _____________________

27. remember to boil the water _____________________

28. be in progress _____________________

29. places of interest _____________________

30. arrange to do sth. _____________________

31. set off_____________________

32. than usual _____________________

33. in total silence _____________________

34. three pieces of information _____________________

35. be filled with the wonders of nature _____________________

36. at the foot of the mountain _____________________

37. a little bit _____________________

39. first name _____________________

40. on a business trip _____________________

41. be tired of _____________________

42. be covered with _____________________

43. at a loss _____________________

44. be home to … …_____________________

45. in perfect harmony with_____________________

46. make use of _____________________

高一英语课件(篇8)

cultural represent ruin burn unite period stone damage ancient project official population breath limit sincerely Pyramid include restore rebuild beauty photograph portrait recreate artist vase brick cave carbon

Spoken English:

1. Giving advice & Make suggestions

What shall we …? Maybe we could …

Shall we …? I’d like to …

Can’t we …? What/how about …?

Should we …? Why don’t you …?

Let’s … Why not …?

1. 描述事物已经受到某种影响或某种处理--使用现在完成时被动语态。例如：

Now, after years of hard work, parts of statues have been put back together and missing pieces have been replaced.

2. 描述人物已经被动地接受某种行为或某种处理--使用现在完成时被动语态。例如：

The sick woman has been sent to hospital, and now you can’t visit her.

Jack has been told about it, so you needn’t call him up.

Use of Language:

1. Master the function use of language as defined above.

2. Help the students to finish the tasks of listening, reading, writing, speaking presented in the book and the exercise book through using what the students have learned. Learn the text about cultural relics and finish the relative exercises and writing tasks, like write a report on the world’s cultural relics, write a brief introduction of my hometown.

Important points: The use of the Passive Voice

Difficult points: Use of the Passive Voice

Teaching aids: Computer, tape-recorder

Way of Teaching: Communication way of teaching, discussion and group work.

Get the students to look at the pictures in their books: a pyramid in Egypt, the Great Wall in China, and Stonehenge in England. Ask the students to name more sites like these and ask what they have in common.

The answers may be: The pyramids, the Great Wall, the Stonehenge are not only the great places of interest but also the symbols of their countries and their cultures.

First go through the listening part together with the students. Get the students to know what they are going to do.

Name of the site Why is it important? What is being done to protect it?

First get the students to know what they are going to do. Then explain that a “culture capsule” – an imaginary large box – will be sent into space. Ask the students to decide what objects to put in the box. The object should help whoever finds the box understand what and who human beings are. Students can work in pairs or groups. They have to decide what to put in the box and explain why they have chosen them. I.e. how the objects will help explain who we are and how we live.

Help the students to decide they want to put in the box and list the reason .

Fish the exercise in the talking part in their workbooks.

Go over the homework.

List some cities like Beijing, Paris, Chang’an, Rome, then ask the students to discuss these questions with their partners.

1. Some cities, like Paris and Beijing, are called great cities of the world. In your opinion, what makes a city great?

2. What are your favourite cities? Why?

3. What cultural relics are there in the place where you live? How important are they?

First give a brief introduction of the text A City of Heroes.

Read the text fast and tell the following sentences true of false:

1. ( ) The city of St Petersburg was rebuilt by Peter the great.

2. ( ) The Germans attacked St Petersburg a hundred years ago.

3. ( ) A portrait of Peter the Great was destroyed by the Germans.

4. ( ) It was difficult for people to rebuild the old palaces.

5. ( ) Workers and painters used old photographs to help them rebuild the city.

6. ( ) St Petersburg will never be as beautiful as it was before.

The answers are: True: 3 4 5. False: 1 2 6.

First tell the main idea of each paragraph.

Paragraph 1 St Petersburg lies on the banks of the river Lena in Russia. More than three hundred years ago, The Russian Czar, Peter the Great, built a new capital here. Peter the Great was a strong and proud man, and the city reflects his personality.

Paragraph 2 St Petersburg has been the center of many important historical events. These events are the reason why the city has become such an important part of Russian culture and history. The people of St Petersburg fought hard against the Nazis during World War II and were determined to rebuild the city when the Nazis had left it in ruins.

Paragraph 3 Rebuilding the great city was difficult, but the people of St Petersburg succeeded. Using old photographs and rescued pieces of the old city, they managed to restore St Petersburg to its former glory.

Paragraph 4 The people of St Petersburg are heroes because they managed to rebuild the city, proving that they are at least as great as Czar Peter.

Retell the text according to the above main ideas.

Finish the exercise in the Post-reading Part on p46.

Find the sentences using the Present perfect passive Voice.

Check the homework..

Fill in the blanks with the proper words or phrases.

First list some sentences that are used in the Present Perfect Passive Voice.

1. It is true that many of the world’s greatest cities have been built on the banks of a river.

2. Many great palaces were built during his lifetime.

3. Building were destroyed, and paintings and …

4. Pieces of the palaces that had been hidden before the Nazis came could now be used to rebuild the city and its culture.

5. now, after years of hard work, parts of statues have been put back together and missing pieces have been replaced.

6. Old paintings, including a portrait of Peter the Great which was found in the snow outside St Petersburg, have been carefully recreated, and the old palaces have been made as wonderful as in the past.

Then ask the students to find the formation of the Present Perfect Passive Voice:

Ask the students to finish the exercises 1-2 in part 1.

Finish the exercise 2 in their workbooks.

Check the homework.

Ask the students to read the passage in the Integrating Skills part. And they should find the way of a passage formation ---

That is how the passage is structured. The tips in their books may be used as a guide when they are reading.

Ask the students to try to make their writing first orally. In the same while, ask several students to read their passage out and find the place where it may be written in other better way. Then show the students a sample writing and analysis the good of the passage.

Leave the exercise of writing in their workbooks as the homework.

高一英语课件(篇9)

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件(篇10)

Teaching goals

1. Talk about modern agriculture and the effect it has on people’s life.

2. Practice giving advice and making decisions.

3. Learn to use “it” for emphasis.

4. Learn to read statistical graphs.

5. Write a plan for a vegetable garden.

Period 1

Step 1: New words

(listen to the pronunciations of each word and try to remember them).

Step 2:Warming up

1. Look at the graph and tell what the meaning of this graph. It tells the growth of major products 1991-1995 compared with 1986-90 percentages.

2. The production of fruit in 1995 increased by a percentage of 85 compared with 1986.

3. Let the students read the sentences on the screen and learn about some changes and effects between agriculture and people’s life.

4. Ask one students to translate the reading material in the paper(the first and the second passages).

1.What do you think causes these changes? 你认问什么原因引起这些变化的?

2.What do you think the changes in eating habits will have on agriculture or nature? 你认为这些饮食变化对农业和自然会起什么作用？

do you think 是插入语，经常位于疑问词之后

Where do you think our headteacher comes from?

Who do you think the old lady is?

有时也可以放在句尾。

What is it, do you think?

2. effect n. 结果，影响

have an effect on 对…有影响

be of no effect 无效

come／go into effect 开始生效

in effect 在实施中

take effect 见效；生效

bring/carry…into effect 实行；实施

affect v. 影响

effective adj. 有效的

I tried to persuade her, but without effect.

Her new red dress will produce quite an effect on everyone.

她的新红衣服会对大家产生很大影响。

My advice didn't have much effect on him.

The idea is of no effect.

These measures will not be brought into effect until next month.

The law came into effect on October 15.

The medicine didn’t take effect.

Step 3 Listening

1. Show and explain the new words.

2. Listen to the tape.

Step 4 Homework

Prepare oral homework: practice giving advice and making decisions.

Read the reading material (pre-reading)

Period 2

Step 1 Revise the new words.

Step 2 Practise speaking

1. If I were you, I would raise pigs.

2. As far as I can see, 依我看,

3. You want to use the land in the best way possible and do the best for everybody in the village.为了村子里的每个人，你想尽自己最大的努力，以最好的办法来使用这块土地。

possible 与最高级连用，强调“尽可能最…”。

He arrived at the worst possible time.他到达的时间，说多糟就有多糟.

The rocket traveled at the highest speed possible. 火箭以最大的速度飞行

Period 3

Step 1: Revision (new words)

Step 2. Pre-reading

1.Skimming

T: “ What’s the title of the reading passage?

Ss: “modern agriculture”

T: “ What does it mean in Chinese? ”

Ss: “现代农业”

T: “ How to say ‘传统农业’in English ? ”

Ss: “ traditional agriculture. ”

T: “ Can you imagine what traditional agriculture is like? ”

Ss: …

② let Ss read the text firstly and answer the following questions:

How much land can be used for faming in China?

(Seven percent of the land.)

What is the advantage and disadvantage of chemical fertilization?

(it helps to produce better crops. But is harmful to the environment.)

What is the biggest problem of Chinese farmers?

(The shortage of arable land.)

3. Skipping

Let Ss read the passage for the second time and answer two questions:

What does “GM” stand for?

(“G” stands for “genetically” from the word “genes”. “M” stands for “modified”, which means “changed”.)

What is the advantage of tomatoes which were using technique known as “GM”?

(The tomatoes are bigger and healthier. They can grow without danger from diseases. They also need much less time to get ripe.)

Innovations改革 Problems Advantages

Chemical fertilisers Shortage of arable land Bigger and better crops

Pumps for irrigation Weather conditions Bigger and better crops

Special seedbeds Shortage of arable land More crops in one year

Machines e.g. tractors How to make production cheaper (not in the text) Bigger crops on more land by fewer hands

International exchange Lack of knowledge Learn from other people

Greenhouses Weather condition Bigger and better crops

Greenhouses (roots in water tanks) Shortage of arable land More crops in one year

GM technique (can grow in poor soil) Shortage of arable land Can grow in poor soil; bigger & healthier; less time to ripe

4. Listening

Let Ss listen to the tape and follow it.

5. Discussion

①let Ss work in groups and imagine what other changes have happened on farms in the last 100 years.

② let Ss discussion the following questions

1.At the beginning of the passage, why does the writer say “It is on the arable land that the farmers produce food for the whole population of China”?

2. What does the writer want to tell us by saying, “Not only food production is important but also taking care of the environment.”?

3. What can we infer from the sentence “In China about one hundred research stations are now doing GM research to make better tomatoes, cotton…?”

4. What can you imagine about the future of food production?

Step IV Post-reading

Finish the exercises in Students Book, page 46, Exercise 1-2

Step V. homework

Workbook exercises

The reading materials.

Period 4

Step I Revision

Step II word study

Finish the exercises in Student book, page 47.

Step III Practice

Let Ss finish the exercises “vocabulary, 1-3” in page 108, Workbook

Step IV Grammar

1. Give Ss some sentences to translate into Chinese and find out difference and sameness among these sentences (slide show)

It is on this arable land that the farmers produce food for the whole population of china.

It was from the early 1990s that scientists started to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.

It was they who/that cleaned the classroom yesterday.

It was in the street that I met her father.

It was the goat’s eyes that he had seen in the darkness.

2. Teach Ss to find out the phrase from the sentence above----It is+被强调部分+that/who…

Translate the following sentences into English:

1.写这本书的人就是玛丽。It is Mary who wrote this book.

2.这个就是长满了美丽的鲜花的花园。It is garden that many beautiful flowers grow in.

3.她就是擅长唱歌的女孩。It is a girl who is good at singing.

4.那就是他叔叔移居纽约的季节。It was for this reason that his uncle moved out of New York.

5. 错的人是我。 It is I who am wrong.

4. Note:

a. 在强调句型中，若被强调部分指人，可以用关系代词who或that；若被强调的是状语，只能用that，不能用when或where。

b. 注意与“It is /was…that +clause”主语从句的区别。

强调句型与it作形式主语，that从句作真正主语十分相似，但主语从句中It is /was后通常用名词或形容词作表语。强调句型中It is /was后是对主语、宾语或状语的强调成分。

5. Let Ss find out some sentence with ‘it’ in the text ‘Modern Agriculture’.

6. Exercises

Let Ss finish the exercises in Student’s book, page 47-48, Exx 1-2.

Let Ss finish the exercises in Workbook, page 109, Exx 1-3.

Finish all the exercises in the book.

Period 5

Step I Reading

1. Let Ss look at the picture and briefly introduce Jia Sixie,

2.skimming: let Ss read the text and find out the information about Jia Sixie (slide show)

Where/born: Yidu, Shandong Province

when/live: Six century AD

where/work: Gaoyang, Shandong Province

what/do: study the science of farming

what book/write: Qi Min Yao Shu

the book/about: both the farming and gardening

the importance of the book: an important summary of the knowledge of farming

3.listening: let Ss listen to the tape and follow it, then finish the exercises (slide show)

True or false:

1.China was the earliest research center for agriculture. ( T )

3.Qi Min YaoShu includes advice on the following subjects: growing green vegetables and fruit trees, keeping cows and sheep, and there are also instructions for making metals. ( F )

4.The spring ploughing should be deeper than the autumn ploughing. ( F )

5.We should plant rice in the same field year after year. ( F )

6.We’d better grow different plants next to each other in the same field. ( T )

Step II Writing

1. Write a plan for a vegetable garden, using the tips in the book, page 49.

2. Read in the reading paper “A plan for a vegetable garden”

3. Assign it as written homework.

Period 6

Step 1 Revision (new words and language points)

Step 2 listening practice

1. Make the students understand what they are going to hear about and what they should do.

2. Play the tape for them to listen twice or three times.

3. Check their answers with the whole class.

Step 3 Workbook exercises

1. Check their answers to the vocabulary exercises and grammar exercises.

Step 4 Homework

Assign TALKING as oral homework

Period 7

Step 1 Revision

Step 2 Workbook

ntinue to do the exercises

Step 3 Reading

1. Allow the students a few minutes to read the introduction about the text in the reading paper.

2. Listen and Read the text “Greening the Hills”.

3. Let the students raise their questions about their difficulties.

4. Discuss the problems in the exercises. Ex 1 and Ex 2. (Answers are shown on the screen).

Step 4. Writing

1. Let the students read the introduction about the writing

2. Let the students read the short passage in the textbook.

3. Make the students understand what and how they should write.

4. Assign it as written homework in exercise books. (Read the sample essay in the reading paper, which may be of some help to the students with their writing).

高一英语课件(篇11)

1．manage 的用法小结：

（1）经常用作及物动词，意思是“管理；处理；支配”。常接名词作宾语。

例如：

He managed the supermarket when the owner was away.

当主人不在的时候，他管理这个超级市场。

She doesn’t know how to manage her children.

她不知道如何管理自己的孩子。

（2）表示“能应付，设法做成某件事”时，常用“manage to do sth.”结构，而且常用一般过去时态。

例如：

The pilot managed to circle the balloon for some time.

这位飞行员设法绕气球飞了一阵。

At first, no ready technical data were available, but we managed to go without.

起初,我们没有现成的技术资料,但也设法照样干下去了。

He managed to avoid an accident. 他设法避免了一场事故。

（3）manage to do sth. 与try to do sth.的区别：前者强调设法完成了某件事情，表示结果等于词组“succeed in doing sth.”；而后者强调尽力去做某件事情，表示动作;相当于“do one’s best to do sth”。

例如：

We managed to get there on time.

We tried to get there on time.

2． ahead的用法小结：

（1）作为副词使用，ahead表示“在前；向前；提前”的意思。

例如：

Walk straight ahead until you reach the river. 一直朝前走到河边。

The road ahead was full of cattle. 前面的路上挤满了牛群。

（2）“ahead of”的意思是“在…之前，超过”。

例如：

Our company is ahead of other makers of spare parts for the airplane.

我们公司制造飞机零部件比别家的业绩好。

He is ahead of his times in his ideas. 他的思想走在时代的前列。

（3）get ahead表示“前进，成功，发迹”。

例如：

He got ahead in his study.

他在学习方面成功了。

（4）go ahead表示“前进，干吧，用吧”。

例如：

--May I borrow your bike?

（1）match多指大小、色调、形状、性质等方面的搭配。

例如：

They are equally matched in their knowledge of Chinese.

他们在中文的造诣上相等。

This hotel can't be matched for friendliness.（引申意义）

这家旅馆良好的服务态度是无与伦比的。

（2）suit多指合乎需要、口味、性格、条件、地位等。

例如：

That'll suit me fine. 那对我太合适了。

No dish suits all tastes. 众口难调。

（3）fit多指尺寸、形状合适，引申为“吻合、协调”。

例如：

Her new coat didn't fit, so she took them back to the shop and changed them for another one.

“她那件上衣不合穿,所以她去商店换了一件。”

Your trousers fit well. 你的裤子很合身。

The shoes don't fit him, they are too small.

这双鞋子他穿不合脚，太小了。

2．unlike与dislike、like的区别：

（1）unlike可以作介词和形容词，意思是“不相似的、不同的”。

例如：

She is unlike her mother; she is tall and her mother is very short.

她不像她妈妈；她很高，而她妈妈很矮。

They gave unlike accounts of the incident.

他们对这件事情的描述各不相同。

（2）dislike可以用作动词和名词，但不能用作介词，是“不喜爱、厌恶”的意思。

例如：

Some people dislike big cities. （作动词）

有些人不喜欢大城市。

She strongly disliked being spoken to like that. （作动词）

她很不喜欢别人对她这样说话。

I felt a strong dislike of the new teacher. （作名词）

我感到很不喜欢这个新教员。

（3）dislike与like不同。后接动词时，dislike习惯上只接动词-ing形式，不能接动词不定式，特别在英国英语中更是如此。

例如：

I dislike having to get up so early.

1．There are also differences as to how often we touch each other, how close we stand to someone we are talking to, and how we act when we meet and part.

注意此句中how引导的几个并列结构；另外，名词difference的复数形式表示具体的不同点，如果difference表示“不同”这个概念，则是不可数名词，无复数形式。

2．And if we are feeling down or lonely, there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.

“There is nothing better than to do…”此处表示“没有比…更好的了”。

例如：

There is nothing better than to sit in a pub drinking.

没有比坐在酒吧里喝酒更好的事了。

3．Words a are important, but the way a person stands, folds his or her arms, or moves his or her hands can also give us information about his or her feelings.

此句中用了几个并列的谓语动词，要注意英语并列成分的规则：除了最后一个并列成分之前用一个并列连词以外，前面的并列成分都可以用逗号隔开。

再如：

While they were walking, they were talking, laughing and playing games. （并列的-ing形式）

Note: 要注意并列的成分的前后一致性，这是单项填空的常考题型。

(一) 动词的-ng形式作主语、宾语和表语：

1）动词的-ing形式作主语时，常表示概括性的或者一般性的行为。例如：

Fighting broke out between the South and the North. 南方与北方开战了。

Losing her new bicycle made her so upset.

她的新自行车丢了，搞得她心烦意乱。

2）动词的-ing形式作宾语时，既可以作动词的宾语，又可以作介词的宾语。某些动词或者动词短语后常接动词-ing形式作宾语。

例如：

Would you mind turning on your radio, please? I want to hear the hour’s news.

请你打开收音机好吗？我想听听本时的新闻。

The sparrow was so lucky that it just missed being caught.

那只麻雀真幸运，它刚好没有被射中。

3）动词的-ing形式可以作表语，表示“什么事是某事”。

例如：

Her job is washing，cleaning and taking care of the children.

她的工作是洗衣服、打扫卫生和看小孩。

Seeing is believing. 眼见为实。

（二）动词的-ing形式作状语：

动词的-ing形式作状语时，其逻辑主语一定是句子的主语，动词的-ing形式可以表示时间、条件、原因、方式或者伴随等情况，v-ing与句子的主语构成主动关系。

例如：

As I didn't receive any letter from him, I gave him a call.

Not receiving any letter from him, I gave him a call.

由于没有收到他的信，我给他打了电话。

If more attention was given to them, the trees could have grown better.

如果多多护理的话，这些树本来能够长得更好的。

Given more attention，the trees could have grown better.

假如多给些照顾，那些树会长得更好。

Many people come to the theme parks, looking for thrills and entertainment.

许多人来到主题公园寻求刺激和娱乐。

（三）动词的-ing形式作定语：

单个动词-ing形式作定语，常位于被修饰的词前；-ing形式短语作定语，常放在被修饰的词后。

例如：

We can see the rising sun. 我们可以看到从东方升起的太阳

He is a retired worker. 他是位退休的工人

There was a girl sitting there. 有个女孩坐在那里。

This is the question given. 这是所给的问题（个别分词如given, left等，尽管是单个的，但常放在被修饰的词后面）

There is nothing interesting. 没有有趣的东西（修饰不定代词的词，常放在被修饰的词后）

（四）动词的-ing形式作宾语补足语：

-ing形式作宾语补足语时，通常在感官动词和使役动词之后，表示一个主动的动作正在进行。值得注意的是：过去分词也可以作宾语补足语，但它们一般表示被动和完成。

例如：

The missing boys were last seen playing near the river.

那些孩子在失踪之前，人们曾经看见他们在河边玩耍。

He found his radio missing. 他发现他的收音机不见了。

I'll have my watch repaired. 我想把我的手表修一下。

[考点] 考查while表示“尽管…但是…”的意思。

[考例1] _________ model business is by no means easy to get into, the good model will always be in demand.

[解析] A本题的题意为“尽管模特行业根本不容易进入，但好模特总是紧缺”。此处只有while可以表达这个意思。

[拓展] while除引导时间状语从句以外，还可以引导表示转折、对比的句子。

例如：

I am a worker, while he is a student. 我是个工人，而他是个学生。（while引导句子表转折）

While I have many visitors every day, the one I have been expecting hasn’t appeared yet. 尽管我每天都有很多来访者，我一直盼望的人至今还没有出现。（while表示“尽管”的意思。）

[考点] 考查非谓语动词在具体语境中的理解。

[考例2] _________ such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.

A．Having suffered B．Suffering C．To suffer D．Suffer

[解析] A非谓语动词在不同语境中，时态、含义都有不同。本句的含义为“河流已经遭受如此严重的污染，现在清理也许太迟了。”谓语动词的动作发生在having suffered之后，所以用的是动词-ing形式的完成式。

一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。

1．It was extremely dangerous, but he m___________ to avoid the accident.

2．The idea of working for state-owned enterprises has little a_________ to young people nowadays.

3．You should have come to the party last night. What p_________ you from joining us?

4．You didn't really see it - it was just your i__________.

5．Let's d_________ ourselves into several groups.

6．Don’t say nonsense! I want a _________(具体的) answer.

7．The nation wants peace; only a _________(少数) want the war to continue.

8． ________(教育) is given to children by the government.

9．Can you tell me for what the church will use the money it gets from__________(收集，募捐)?

10．He held the boy _________(牢固地) in his arms and cried.

二、单项填空：

1．China Daily is _______ a newspaper, it can also help us to improve our English.

A．less than B．more than C．not more than D．no more than

2．__________ is very important.

A． Solve the problem B．How to solve the problem

C．How to be solved the problem D．What to deal with the problem

3．He didn’t move _________ the music went on, but got up _______ it ended.

A．when, while B．while, when C．while, while D．when, when

4．The athletes stood, _________ their national flag ____________.

A．seeing, raising B．watching, raising

C．looked at, rising D．seeing, rising

5．Jack spent as much time as he __________ over his lessons.

A. could going B. went C. could go D. would going

6．I meant ___________ you, but I was too busy.

A．to have called at B．calling on C．to call on D．to have called on

7. I am often told that too much work and too little rest often _______ illness.

A. leads to B. leads on C. leads into D. leads off

8．Every summer is the summit period(高峰期) during which university students ________ jobs, and the talents-exchange(人才交流) market will accordingly prosper(繁荣).

A. find B. hunt C. look for D. hunt for

9．Some passengers told the reporters about their ___________ in the burning train.

A. details B. trips C. events D. experiences

10．China’s genetic engineering(基因工程) industry __________ in the late 1980s, two decades after some other countries.

A. set off B. set in C. set to D. set back

完形填空：

I would like to suggest that for sixty to ninety minutes each evening all television broadcasting in the United states be forbidden by law.

Let us take a 1 , reasonable look at what the results might be if such a(an) 2 were accepted: families might use the time for a real family hour. Without the distraction of TV, they might 3 together after dinner and actually talk to one another. It is well known that many of our 4 --everything in fact, from the generation gap to the high divorce rate to some forms of 5 illness-are caused at least in part by 6 to communicate. By using the quiet family hour to 7 our problems, we might get to know each other better, and to like each other better.

On evening when such talk is 8 , families could discover more active pastimes(消遣，娱乐). Freed from TV, forced to find their own activities, they might take a 9 together to watch the sunset 10 they might take a walk together. 11 free time and no TV, children and adults might discover reading. There is more entertainment in 12 than in a TV program. 13 report that the generation growing up with television can hardly write an English sentence, 14 at the college level. 15 is often learned from reading. A more literate new generation could be a product of the quiet hour.

A different 16 of reading might also be done as it was in the past: reading aloud. The quiet hour could become the story hour. When the 17 ends, the TV net works might be forced to 18 with better shows in order to get us back from our newly discovered activities.

At first glance, this idea seems radical(激进的). How will we spend the time then? The fact is: it has been only twenty-five years 19 television came to control American free time. Those of us thirty-five and older can 20 childhoods without television. It wasn’t that difficult.

1． A．valuable B．pleasant C．quick D．serious

2． A．advice B．suggestion C．opinion D．offer

3． A．get around B．stand still C．meet D．sit around

4． A．problems B． trouble C．affairs D．misfortune

5． A． physical B．common C．mental D．familiar

6． A．attempt B．failure C．ability D．permission

7． A．discuss B．talk C．make sure D．see to

8． A．impossible B． unnecessary C．funny D．unpleasant

12． A．a fine poem B．a good book C．a quiet hour D．a composition

13． A．Professors B． Scientists C． Parents D．Educators

15． A．Writing B．Skill C．Speaking D．Listening

16． A．form B． kind C．method D．step

17． A．reading B．quiet hour C．activity D．program

18． A． come across B. come about C．come up D．broadcast

19． A．before B．since C．until D．after

20． A．remind B． remember C．recognize D．know

一、1．managed 2．attraction 3．prevented 4．imagination 5．divide 6．specific

7．minority 8．Education 9．collections 10．firmly

1-5 DBDAC 6-10 BABCB 11-15 DBDCA 16-20 ABCBB

1．D 作者在第一段提出了自己的建议。下面解释自己的理由。首先作者建议用认真理性的态度考虑这个建议被接受后的结果。根据reasonable的含义也可判断出。

2．B 从空白前的不定冠词可以排除advice。从文章第一句作者就表明自己要提出建议，因此选suggestion。

3．D 吃过饭，全家人坐在餐桌旁交流。

4．A 由many可以推断出该空应该填入可数名词，首先排除trouble，该空后的破折号是对空白处词的解释。

5．C 家庭缺少交流、理解而引起的往往是精神疾病。

6．B 根据上下文可以判断出答案。

7．A “discuss our problem”。家人坐在一起讨论问题，增进了解。

8．B 晚上家人聚会还可以找到新的消遣形式。

9．C 由下面的they might take a walk together可以排除A项。为了看日出，开车到某个地方是很可能的。

10．B 此题用or表示选择。

11．D with free time and no TV表示原因。

12．B 此题与前句是顺承关系。

13．D educator“教育者”。

14．C 教育者的研究显示：看电视长大的这一代人几乎不会写一个英语句子，甚至上了大学的人也不行。Even表示强调。

15．A 学生看电视过多，因此不会写句子。

16．A 朗读是读书的一种形式。

17．B 阅读的那种安静时间可以变成讲故事的时间，这时，电视网络系统就必须提供更好的节目以把人们再吸引回来。

18．C come up with “提出、提供”，不能用被动语态； come across：“偶遇”； come about：“发生，产生”； broadcast“广播，播放”，不与with连用。

19．B 主句用的是现在完成时，可以判断出该用since。

20．B 35岁及其以上的人还应该能记得没有电视的童年。

高一英语课件(篇12)

Aims and demands:

1. Develop the Ss’ listening ability .

2. Grasp the usage of the language points:

at the doctor’s , take a look,, knock into fell over

It feels a bit tense .

That sounds very interesting.

Difficulty: Ask the Ss to make a dialogue between the doctor and a patient.

Teaching methods: listening, speaking, practicing

Learning method: How to listen smartly

Teaching aids: tape recorder, some slides

Procedure:

Step 1. New words:

T: How many gold medals did the Chinese players win?

There are a lot of international champions in China in the Olympic Games.

The two of whom are gymnasts . Who are they ?

Ss: They are 李小鹏 and 刘璇 .

T: Li is an international champion on the double bars.

Liu is an international champion on the beam.

And also the whole Chinese gymnastic team have won the gold prize.

T: Today we are going to learn “ Gymnastics” .

Do you know what pieces of equipment are used in gymnastics ?

rings , beam, high bar, high-and-low bars, double bars, beam, “horse”(side horse / pummelled horse（鞍马） , vaulting horse（跳马）)

T: Do men and women , boys and girls do the same kinds of exercises?

------- Men perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar, and on a type of “horse” with our legs which has two handles fixed to the top surface.

While women perform on the high-and-low bars, one of which is higher than the other, and the beam, which is a length of wood only four inches wide which is fixed at a height of 1.20 meters above the ground.

Listen to the tape and choose the correct answers:

1. Sharon is a gymnast. She is ______.

A. at the teacher’s B. at the doctor’s C. at her friend’s D. at home

2. Something is wrong with Sharon’s ______.

A. left leg B. right shoulder C. left shoulder D. right leg

3. Sharon hurt herself when she was _____.

A. doing some exercises B. finishing some exercises

C. on the high-and-low bars D. jumping

4. The change between ___ temperatures makes the blood move and the damaged parts begin to repair themselves.

A. hot and cool B. warm and cool C. cold and cool D. hot and cold

5. At the end of the week, throw the frozen peas away. They _____ to eat.

A. will be fit B. won’t be fit C. would not like D. would like to

Step 4. Read by themselves and answer the questions;

2. What’s wrong with her? ---- Something is wrong with her left shoulder.

3. How did she hurt her shoulder? ---- While she was doing gym.

4. What kind of treatment did the doctor advise her to use? ----- to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-peas treatment.

5. How often does she have to take this treatment? ---- twice a day for a week

6. Do you think that this interesting treatment is effective? ----- Yes.

7. Have you ever used the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment? ---------

What treatment does the doctor tell her to do?

---- To use the hot-cloth-and-frozen-pea treatment.

Step 4. Reading and find out the language points

3. It feels a bit tense.

4. knock into sb.

Can you knock the nail into the wall?

The boy ran for the ball and knocked into a man.

He walked in the dark and knocked into a tree.

He slipped into a banana skin and fell over.

7. That sounds very interesting.

8. fit to eat:

Make up a dialogue between the two---- one is a doctor and the other is a patient

Patient: Says what the problem is

Doctor: Makes one or more comments and then gives some advice

P: Yes, I can’t sleep well.

P: Can you give me some medicine so that I can have a good sleep?

D: What can I do for you?

P: I’ve got a pain here. My left shoulder hurts.

D: Let me have a look at it.

P: Oh, I feel terrible.

D: Mmn, I see. It feels a bit tense, but it’s nothing serious.

P: Shall I take any medicine?

D: Yes. Take this medicine, two pills a time, three times a day. And try to use the hot-cloth-and-frozen peas treatment.

When a patient comes in what will the doctor say?

What can I do for you?

How can I help you?

What seems to be the matter?

Can I help you?

What will the patient say?

I’ve got a pain…

I’ve got a headache and a cough day and night.

I’ve got a temperature and all my bones ache.

I feel terrible.

I hurt my leg while I was….

I don’t feel well.

Then what will the doctor say?

Let me take a look at it / you.

Let me feel your pulse.

Left me take your temperature.

Oh, I see. It’s nothing serious.

Have a good rest and you’ll ..

You’ll be all right / well better soon.

Take this medicine / two pills a time, three times a day.

Aims and demands: Develop the Ss’ reading ability and have a good understanding of the text

Difficulty and importance: Have a deeper understanding of the text

Teaching methods: Reading and listening and discussion

Teaching aids: a tape recorder and some slide shown

Procedure:

What kinds of equipment are used in doing the gymnastic exercises?

As we know from the dialogue , Sharon hurt her left shoulder while doing some exercises on the high-and-low bars. So while you are doing gym, you should be more careful.

Now look at the pictures and tell :

Where are the gymnasts doing exercises / performing? ( P 51)

Ss: He is performing on the high bar.

He is performing on the double bars.

He is jumping / performing on a “horse”.

She is performing on a beam.

Listen to the tape of Lesson 34 and tell whether the following statements are true or false.

1. Olympic competitions started in Greece. T

2. Modern gymnastics began in the 18th century. F

3. If you want to become a top gymnast, it is important to start when you are 14 or 15 years old.F

4. Boys win Olympic gymnastics medals usually between the age of 19 and 25. T

5. Both boys and girls perform on the rings, on the double bars, on the high bar and so on. F

6. Only girls perform on the high-and-low bars. T

7. Only boys do floor exercises on the mat. F

8. Make sure you put on some watches, rings, and necklaces before you start. F

9. Ww simple safety measures to follow while ( you are ) training.

8. Follow : a) to take or accept 遵守,采纳,听从

follow the teacher’s instructions

You are speaking too fast and we can’t quite follow you.听懂

Follow the path and you will see the cinema.

She followed me into the classroom.

e) following can be used together with “the” , it means “next”

in the following year=== next year

highly: to a high degree 高度的,非常的

eg: Advertising is a highly developed twentieth-century industry. 高度发达的

He is a highly skilled worker. 非常熟练的

固定词组:

1. be content to do sth. 满足干…… 满意做……

They each have a computer on the desk.

Each of them has a computer on the desk.

4. glance at : look quickly at / give a quick at

5. be busy doing sth.

They are busy training in the gymnastic.

We had been bus preparing for the mid-term examination.

The first thing …. . was to go up her trainer and thanked her.

句中两个作表语的不定式 go up to 和 thank her for 都省略了 to ,这是因为主语有定语从句 she did 来修饰的缘故.

一般地说,解释 do 的精确意思的分句,可以用不带 to 的动词不定式.

我们现在想做的就是躺下来休息.

What we want to do now is ( to ) lie down and rest.

我所做的就是推了他一下.

What I did was ( to ) give him a little push.

字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.

What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.

Agreement.

Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)

1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started. ( that )

2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin. (that)

3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China. ( being performed/performed)

4. My bike is repairing . ( being repaired)

5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone . ( being left )

6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience. (true )

7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics. ( them )

8. The students are preparing the exam. ( add for )

9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music. ( to )

10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25. ( won, between…and)

11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand. (balance)

(steady adj, adv. Steadily adv. )

12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous. (highly )

广告业是二十世纪高度发达的行业.

Advertising is a highly developed twentieth century industry.

他是个非常熟练的工人.

He is a highly skilled worker.

Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.

13. She is satisfied with her present job.

be content with sth.

be content to do sth.

14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily. (In all / all in all)

15. She gave a quick look at the judge. ( glanced at )

16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true )

字典的作用是帮助学生查生字的词义和用法.

What a dictionary does is ( to) help the students to find out the meaning and the usage of new words.

Correct the mistakes if any. ( Lesson 34~35)

1. It was in Greece where the Olympic competition started.

2. It was in 1811 when an outdoor gymnastics center for men was opened in Berlin.

3. There are also records of gymnastics performing in China.

4. My bike is repairing .

5. He didn’t mind leaving at home alone .

6. Being lost can be a terrifying experience.

7. Dance is an important part of training as it prepares they for the types of movements required in gymnastics.

8. The students are preparing the exam.

9. In competitions women perform some of their exercises with music.

10. Men usually gained Olympic gymnastics medals between 19 to 25.

11. The gymnasts should hold a position steady, keep their balances while doing a handstand.

12. Training by yourself in a gym can be high dangerous.

Replace the following underlined phrases with the phrases in L35.

13. She is satisfied with her present job.

14. In a word , she gave a good performance and landed neatly and steadily.

15. She gave a quick look at the judge.

16. What we want to do now is lie down and rest. ( true or false ?)

Exercises for Unit 9 ---3A DCABB CBB

1. ___ him and then try to copy what he does. (99)

A. Mind B. Glance at C. Stare at D. Watch

2. The little boy runs for the football and ___ a man standing there.

3. I cheered do loudly at the match that I completely ___ my voice.

A. lost B. missed C. forgot D. left

4. --- Do you think the Stars will beat the Bulls?

--- I don’t know. But this is the last time. The fans ___ them to win whole – heartedly.

A. hope B. require C. prefer D. demand

5. It was how the young man had learned five foreign languages ___ attracted the audience’s interest.

A. so that B. that C. what D. in which

6. It was for this reason __ her uncle moved out of New York and settled down in a small village. ( S)

7. It is the ability to so the job ___ matters not where you come from or what you are. (2000)

8. It was not ___ she took off here dark glasses ___ I realized she was a famous film star. (92)

Correct the mistakes: (for Unit 9 --- 3A )

It was Sunday and Zhou Lan was going 1.____

to take part in the first gymnastic compe-

tition. As soon as her competition started, 2.____

she tried her best and did good in per- 3.____

forming on three pieces of equipments 4.____

as well as on the floor. Now the time came

to her performance on the high -and-low 5.____

bars. She stands below them and waited. 6.____

When the judge nodding, she began . 7.____

She jumped upwards, caught the high bar

in two hands and did a neat circle . 8.____

Altogether,she performed wonderful and 9.____

landed nearly and steadily on the floor. Then

came the results. Victory for Zhou Lan!

1. true 2. her--- the 3. well 4. equipment 5. to – for 6. stood 7. nodded 8. in – with

高一英语课件(篇13)

Period 3

Integrating skills ---- reading and writing (snack)

Step 1. Warming up (pre-reading)---watch a video and answer:

Show a tape and get the ss to discuss

1. Which diet is healthier, Chinese or western? Why?

Chinese, it’s high in ….. while the western diet contains …

2. why do some of the British have no teeth left at the age of thirty?

They eat too much sugar and fat in the form of chips and coke.

Although chinese diet is healthier ,we still feel hungry between meals. So what will we have to do?

Eat some snacks.

Ok. Now listen what snacks are mentioned in the listening materials?

Step 2 listen and speak out

To learn the structure of how to write a recipe. including two activities.

Activity One: read and learn what the 1st para talks about.

Para 1 1.Tick out what food is mentioned?

2. Read and answer

1) Which is healthier? Fruit

2) Why is fruit healthy?

It hasn’t too much fat and sugar. It gives us carbohydrates, which our body and brain use for energy? It also gives us fiber and Vitamin.

3) Why are the other two unhealthy food?

They have too much tat and sugar.

Activity Two

Para 2 Learn the outline of a recipe

Q1 : Besides these two snacks, the passage also mentions some other snacks. What are they?

Answer:---- Shaomai and Chicken roll-ups.

Q2 : How can we make Shaomai and Chicken roll-ups?.

Get Ss to give the outline of one of the two recipes (pair work)

Write an outline of a recipe:

Name:

Ingredients:

Directions:

Then deal with the recipe one by one.

Step 3: writing (group work) begin to write a recipe according to what you have learnt in the passage.

Discuss and write a recipe

Name Ingredients Directions

Key words:

Green onions, garlic, pepper, soy sauce, ginger, vinegar, sugar, wine, salt.

Peel, slice, dice, steam, fry, boil, stir, mix, add, chop, spoon., fill, cut… into pieces, fold, roll up

Discuss: 1) name your dish

2) talk about the ingredients of the dish and directions

3) list your steps of how to cook the dish.

Step 4 Evaluation

Share what the Ss have written in groups and in Class.

Teacher give some comments on the group works.

Sample 1 :

Golden delicious fish!

Ingredients:

a fish, green onions, garlic, ginger, red peppers, pepper sauce, salt, vinegar, soy sauce

Directions:

1. Cut the body of the fish.

2. Add salt to the fish before it is cooked.

3. Chop the bulb of green onions into small sections, and cut the green onions into pieces. Peel the garlic.

4. Mix the onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Fry them for a short time. Then get them all out.

5. Cook the fish and add vinegar and soy sauce.

6. Add onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Also add pepper sauce and water to boil the fish for some time.

7. Spoon the fish and add some fresh chopped green onions.

Sample 2:

Golden delicious fish!

Ingredients:

a fish, green onions, garlic, ginger, red peppers, pepper sauce, salt, vinegar, soy sauce

Directions:

First cut the body of the fish.and add some salt to the fish before it is cooked. Second chop the bulb of green onions into small sections, and cut the green onions into pieces. Peel the garlic. Mix the onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. Next fry them for a short time. Get them all out. Cook the fish and add vinegar and soy sauce. Then Add some onions, garlic, ginger and red peppers. You can also add pepper sauce and water to boil the fish for some time. Finally spoon the fish and add some fresh chopped green onions. Now the golden fish is ready and you can enjoy it.

教后感:

高一英语课件(篇14)

Teaching goals

1. Talk about humour and comedians

2. Practice saying tongue twisters

3. Express intensions and plans

4. Learn to use the –ing Form (1) as Atrribute and Object Complement

5. Write a funny story or joke in English

Period 1 Word study

1. Homour/humor

(1) amusement 幽默;诙谐;幽默感

He has no sense of humour. 他没有幽默感。

(2) person’s state of mind; temper 心情,心境

My daughter is in a good humour today. 我女儿今天很高兴。

(3) v. 使满足；迁就

When a person is ill he may have to be humored.

一个人生病时，被人都的迁就他。

out of humour 不高兴；心情不好

humourous adj. 幽默感的，诙谐的

2. bitter adj. 苦的；难过的；痛苦的

The soup is bitter.

His failure to pass the examination was a bitter disappointment.

他考试失败是一件极令人失望的事。

a bitter pill to swallow 苦药丸;勉强接受的苦事

to the bitter end 到底；拼命

take the bitter with the sweet 甘与苦都接受

bitterly adv. 苦涩地 bitterness n. 苦味

3. comedy 喜剧 tragedy 悲剧

comedian 喜剧演员；行动滑稽的人

comedienne 喜剧中的女演员；女丑角

He prefers comedy to tragedy.

Comedians often work alone or as a pair.

Song Dandan is a popular comedienne.

4. intend v. ---have in mind as a purpose or plan 打算；意欲

intend to do sth 打算做…

intend that… 打算；

intend sb to do sth 想让某人做某事

be intended for 是为…设计的

intend to have done sth. 本想做某事（而没做）

intention n. 意图；目的；意旨

1.你今天打算做什么？

.2.他们计划今年完成这一工程。

3.我们打算让他去说服李先生。

4.这本书是给孩子们写的.

5.我本想去拜访你，但是来了一位不速之客。

5. amuse v. = satisfy or excite the sense of humour or cause laughter of 使欢乐；使发笑

amusement n. 快乐；娱乐；消遣

amusing adj. 引起乐趣的；娱人的

amusingly adv. 娱人地

feel/be amused at/by/with 对…感到有趣

1.我们玩游戏自乐。

2. 他的回答使我好笑。

6. appreciate v.

（1）be thankful or grateful for 感激

（2）understand and enjoy the good qualities of

赏识；鉴赏；欣赏

1.我感激对我的帮助。

2.凡高死后他的画才得到赏识。

3.我欣赏演出的每一个节目。

4.如蒙邀请，不胜感激。

7. suffer v. =experience pain or difficulty 受…苦／折磨

suffering n. 痛苦苦难

sufferer n. 受难者；病人

sufferable adj. 受得住的；禁得住的

When I was in my childhood, I suffered from poverty.

Economy in Iraq is suffering from the war.

I know you have suffered a lot. = I know you have had a lot of sufferings.

8. Operate v.---(cause to) work 开动; 使运转; 使生效; 操作;管理；作手术

The machine operates continuously.

This law operates universally. 这个规律是普遍起作用的。

He intends Dr Li to operate on him.

The machines are operated by electricity.

This company operates two factories.

Operation n. 工作；操作；生效；手术

Operator n. 操作人员；电话接线员；

Operative adj. 操作的；运转的；有效的

9. Direction n. 方向；方位；（pl.）指示；说明；倾向；

He drove in the direction of London.

He gave me directions to enable me to find his house.

Our school is under the direction of a good principle.

The enemy ran away in all directions.

directive adj. 指导的

director n. 指导者；董事

direct adj. 直接的

directly adv. 直接地

10. confuse v. ---mix up; put into disorder 弄糊涂；使混乱；混淆；

The road sign confused the driver.

Don't confuse Austria with [and] Australia.

They asked me so many questions that I got confused.

Confused adj. 混乱的；慌乱的；狼狈的

Confusedly adv. 慌乱地；混乱地

Confusion n. 混乱；慌乱；混淆

Period 2

Step 1 Warming up

1. Show a Chinese tongue twister to Ss and let them speak out as quickly as possible.(slide show)

“四是四，十是十；十四是十四，四十是四十；谁要把十四说成四十，我就打他十四；谁要把四十说成十四，我就打他四十。”

2. T: “In fact, not only are there many Chinese tongue twisters, but also there are many English tongue twisters. ” let Ss read the following tongue twister as quickly as possible.

1. She sells sea shells on the seashore. The seashells she sells are seashells she is sure.

2. There those thousand thinkers were thinking how did the other three thieves go through.

3. Picky people pick Peter Pan Peanut Butter. Peter Pan Peanut is the peanut picky people pick.

4. I wish to wish the wish you wish to wish, but if you wish the wish the witch wishes, I won't wish the wish you wish to wish.

5. I thought a thought. But the thought I thought wasn't the thought I thought I thought. If the thought I thought I thought had been the thought I thought, I wouldn't have thought so much.

3. T say: “ It is difficult for people to say the sentence without making errors, these types of sentences are called tongues twisters. Tongue twisters are also difficult for native speakers. It can be fun to practise a few and try to see who can say them fastest.”

Step 2 Listening

1. Let Ss listen to the tape the first time, without taking notes. Make sure they understand all the words before listening. Then, ask them to finish Exercise 1.

2. let Ss listen to the tape again and ask them to finish Exercise 2. Then play the tape again to help them finish the Exercise 2

Step 3 Speaking

1. T asks: “Do you like to watch comedies or crosstalk shows?”

“ Which comedies, little sketches, or crosstalk shows do you like best? ”

“ Who is your favourite comedian? Why do you like him/ her?”

2. Listen and read the dialogue, then explain some language points in the dialogue.

make sb. laugh act the role of

tongue twister a couple of intend to

3. let Ss work in pairs, one act as a journalist and the other act as a circus clown and let them make a similar dialogue about interview between journalist and circus, then let Ss act it out in the class.

4. Learn useful expressions to express intensions and plans:

5. Group work (A)

6. Group work (B)

Step 4 Homework

1. Write a story according to the pictures and what you have heard on the tape.

2. TALKING: (Workbook, page 108)

Ask Ss to look at the pictures, make up a funny story about what is happening and say whether they think the situations are funny or not.

Period 2

Step 1 Revision

1. Word list

2. Enjoy the students’ dialogues

3.Read the following sentences as quickly as possible.

1). A skunk sat on a stump and thunk the stump stunk, but the stump thunk the skunk stunk.

2). Six thick thistle sticks. Six thick thistles stick.

3). She sells sea shells by the sea shore.

The shells she sells are surely seashells.

So if she sells shells on the seashore,

I'm sure she sells seashore shells.

Step 2 Pre-reading

1. Show some pictures to Ss :

Tasks: “Do you know these people?”

Stan Laurel and Oliver Hardy

The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy.” the thin one is called Stan Laurel, while the stout one is called Oliver Hardy. They are funny because they are each other’s opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.

Mr Bean

Although Mr Rowan Atkinson acts as different comic characters he is most famous around the world as Mr Bean. Mr Bean is funny because he makes funny faces, he acts silly, he seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.

Dustin Hoffman

Dustin Hoffman in the film Tootsie (1982). In this film Hoffman acts the role of a woman, and many people agree that his performance was so good that you often can’t tell the difference. But in the film of course there all kinds of funny moments.

Ma Ji

Ma Ji is a well-known artist of crosstalk shows in China. His numerous crosstalk shows always make his audience roar with laughter.

2. Read the text and find out the best choice.

1).Why is Dustin Hoffman so famous?

A. He is famous for his works.

B. He is famous for his foreign accent.

C. He is famous for his role acting as a woman.

D. He is good at playing on words.

2). What does a “sketch” mean in the text?

A. a rough, quickly made drawing

B. general outline

C. short, humourous play

D. a piece of writing

3). Comedians and players in a comedy are similar in ______.

A. Their way of playing with words

B. Clothes

C. Crossing-dressing way

D. Foreign accent

4). Choose the main idea of each paragraph.

a.Description of a clown b.What’s a crosstalk show

c.The traditional crosstalk show d.Description of comedians

e.The writers of comedies both at home and abroad

A. 1-e; 2-a; 3-d; 4-b; 5-c

B. 1-e; 2-d; 3-c; 4-a; 5-b

C. 1-a; 2-e; 3-d; 4-b; 5-c

D. 1-e; 2-a; 3-b; 4-d; 5-c

5). Why have crosstalk shows been popular with people? Which of the following is not the reason?

A. They have two speakers.

B. They make people not only laugh, but also think about life.

C. The richness of the spoken language is made full use of.

D. Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming words.

Step 3 post-reading

1. Pair work let Ss describe a clown in their own words.

2. Discussion compare Western and Chinese comedy shows. What do they have in common? How are they different?

3. Exercise finish the exercise 2 in Studentbook, page 53

Step 3. listening True (T) or False (F)

1.Camedies are music plays that make people laugh.

2.Word play is a way to create fun in comedies.

3.Clowns use some words to make people laugh.

4.Both body language and face are important in comedians’ shows.

5.A crosstalk show has two speakers making many jokes and funny conversations.

Step 4 Oral practice

1. Can you describe a clown in your own words?

2. What does a clown look like?

Step 5 language points

make …funny 使得…有趣

be famous for 因…而著名

make fun of 取笑; 开…的玩笑

roar with laughter 大笑

make-up n. 化妆

act out 表演

have in common with 和…有共同之处

date back to ＝date from 追溯到

a flow of 源源不断的

make use of 利用

Step 6 translation

1. 西安以兵马俑而著名.

Xi’an is famous for the Terra Cotta Warriors.

2.有时候相声演员以取笑自己来逗观众大笑.

Sometimes crosstalk players make fun of themselves to make the audience roar with laughter.

3. 西安古城墙始建于明朝.

Xi’an City Wall dates back to the Ming dynasty.

4.如今越来越多的人开始利用源源不断的网络资源.

Nowadays, more and more people begin to make use of the constant flow of information on the internet.

Step 7 exercises

1. He hates to be _____.

A. make fun of B. making fun of

C made fun of D. made fun

2. The castle ____ the 16th century.

A. is dated to B. dates from

C. dated from D. is dating back to

3. It is ____ to have cold drinks on such a hot day.

A. a fun B. funny C. fun D. funs

4. Our losses should be ____ with more loans, otherwise we won’t be satisfied.

A. made in B. made out C. made for D. made up

5. He put his whole heart into ____ ways ____ the quality of the products.

A. think of; of improve B. think up; to improve

C. thinking of; improving D. thinking up; of improving

Period 5

Integrating skill

Step 1 Reading comprehension

1.Which of the following is not mentioned in the text?

A. The writer was on her way to an interview.

B. She braked hard and hit another cyclist.

C. She shouted the driver of a yellow car.

D. The driver of the yellow car was angry with her for being so rude.

2. The driver of the yellow car turned out to be ______.

A.The boss of the office

B.The manager of the company

C.One of her friends

D.The man with whom she had to work together

3. What does she mean by the sentence “the last time we met I did most of the talking”?

A.You listened to me last time we met.

B. I’ll listen to you this time.

C. I shall say nothing about the accident.

D. I think you must be angry with me.

4. Which of the following can be used as another title for the text?

A. An Accident

B. An Interview

C. Tell Him What You Think of Him!

D. A Kind Manager

5. From the text, we can conclude that the manager was ______.

A.A careless driver B. selfish

C. Tolerant (宽容的) D. determined

Step 2 language points:

1.be on good terms with 与某人关系好

2.cut in 插入

3.in the other direction 朝着另外方向

in the direction of 朝着…方向

4. brake hard 使劲刹车

5.go up 上前去

6.lay down 放下

7.drive off 开车走掉

8.knock off 撞掉

9.shout at 冲着…大嚷

10. be on time for 按时

11. in great surprise 吃惊的

12. in (total) silence 一言不发地

13. look on…as… ＝ regard…as… 把…看作是

14. be angry with sb 对…生气

15. make jokes about 拿…开玩笑

Step 3. exercises:

1. 他们把受伤的人放在地上。

2. 我看见他开车向着城里的方向去了。

3. 他对着我大叫大嚷，我很生气。

4. 我和李岩关系一直很好，我把他当作我的最亲密的朋友。

5. 那个司机把一个男孩撞下自行车，却驾车跑了。

They laid the injured man down on the ground.

I saw him drive away in the direction of the town.

I was angry with him for his shouting at me.

I have been on good terms with Li Yan and I look on him as my closest friend.

The driver knocked a boy off his bike but drove off.

Step 4 Homework

Write a funny story or joke in English.

Period 6

Grammar

Period 7

Exercises in workbook

Period 8

Workbook integrating skills

1. Read the poem and explain the meaning of it.

2. Understand the poem better by going through the explanations on the reading paper.

高一英语课件(篇15)

The First Period

Ⅰ. 汉英翻译：

1. 对．．．有影响 have an effect on

2. 违背自然 go against nature

3. 作．．．笔记 take notes of

4. 尽可能充分利用时间 make as much use of time as possible

5. 引进 bring in

6. 记得某事 have ... in mind

7. 扮演角色 act the role of

8. 哄堂大笑 roar with laughter

9. 使用双关语 play on words

10. （与某某）有共同之处 have in common with

11. 说实话 tell the truth

12. 从一种文化到另一种文化 from culture to culture

13. 直视某人的眼睛 look into one's eyes

14. 成圆形状 in a circle

15. 昂起头来 hold up one's head

16. 沿路直走 go straight down this road

17. 共同的 in common

18. 以．．．为基础 be based on

19. 精力集中于 focus on

20. 在海底行走 walk on the ocean floor

Ⅱ. 单词拼写:

1. Advanced techniques / technology (技术) have been used to increase the produce.

2. The shortage / lack (缺乏) of water reminds people to save water.

3. He has been into gardening (园艺) since childhood.

4. I'm fond of the golden (金色) sun rays at sunset.

5. He is short of practical (实际) experience.

6. The Chinese Revolution has been divided into several stages (时期) .

7. The actual (实际) cost was much higher than we had expected.

8. We take this opportunity of expreessing our sincere appreciation (感激) of your help.

9. The whole ceremony took place silently (寂静无声) .

10. They went to an amusement (娱乐) park last Sunday.

11. This is a confusing (难以理解的) word because it had two meanings.

12. A drunk man drove a truck crazily (疯狂的) in the street and resulted in a serious accident.

13. He bent (弯腰) forward to hear what the child said.

14. I'm very sorry that this has occurred (发生) to you.

15. The attraction (引力) of the moon for the earth causes the tides.

16. The old temple was delivered in sections (部分) and assembled on the site.

17. With just a little imagination (想象) you could turn this place into a palace.

18. A minority (少数) of the children wanted to dance, but the majority chose a picnic.

19. There was a quarrel about dividing (分开) the stolen goods.

20. He explained all the details (细节) to us.

Ⅲ. 句型转换：

1. Although China is a big country, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.

Big as China is, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.

2. Speak English where it is possible.

Speak English where possible.

3. Future agriculture should depend not only on traditional methods but also on high technology.

Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.

4. More latest technical information was introduced from abroad.

More latest technical information was brought in from abroad.

5. Jia Sixie, who lived in the sixth century, wrote a book called Qi Min Yao Shu.

Jia Sixie, living in the sixth century, wrote a book which was called Qi Min Yao Shu.

6. Their clothes, make-up and the way they walk make people laugh.

It is their clothes, make-up and the way they walk that make people laugh.

7. Dating from the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.

Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.

8. Their talk includes not only tongue twisters but also rhythm and rhythming words.

Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming words as well as tongue twisters.

9. I came with the intention of staying, but now I have decided to leave.

I intended to come here to stay, but now I have decided to leave.

10. I decided to consider the whole matter to be a great joke.

I decided to look on the whoke matter as a great joke.

11. Just like spoken language, body language is not the same in different cultures.

Just like spoken language, body language varies from culture to culture.

12. In some countries, for example, France and Russia, a visiting friend is greeted with a kiss on the cheek.

In some countries, such as France and Russia, a visiting friend is welcomed with a kiss on the cheek.

13. A smile can be helpful for us to pass the difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

A smile can help us get though difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

14. If we are feeling sad, it's the best to see the smiling face of a good friend.

If we are feeling down or lonely , there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.

15. After visitors enjoyed the rides at the headland, they could take the shuttle to the lowland.

Having enjoyed the rides at the headland, visitors could take the shuttle to the lowland.

16. Visitors can go on exciting rides at the place where they can feel what is like to do things.

Visitors can go on exciting rides where they can feel what is like to do things.

17. You sit in a car that ”falls“ from a tall tower, and you scream your way down to a safe landing.

Screaming your way down to a safe landing, you sit in a car that ”falls“ from a tall tower.

18. The movie is made according to a real-life incident.

The movie is based on a real-life incident.

19. Your ideas should include all kinds of attractions and activities.

Your ideas should include a variety of attractions and activities.

20. Even the guestures we use for ”yes“ and ”no “ are different around the world.

Even the guestures we use for ”yes“ and ”no“ are not the same all over the world.

The Second Period

单项选择：

1. She's look ______ the leading actress in the film.

A. out into B. for as C. on as D. out of [ C ]

2. Tigers, which were considered to be ______ to man, now are on the list of endangered animals.

A. a danger B. danger C. dangers D. endangered [ A ]

3. He ______ the children for hours with his stories and jokes..

A. made B. amuse C. delight D. entertained [ D ]

4. My interest in stamp collecting ______ my school days.

A. dated back to B. dates to C. dates on D. dates from [ D ]

5. The fire ______ at might was still seen ______ the next morning.

A. breaking out; burning

B. to breal out; to burn

C. broke out; burnt

D. had broken out; burning [ A ]

6. I didn't ______ the importance of English ______ I decided to have that job interview.

A. know; unless B. realize; until

C. see; when D. notice; while [ B ]

7. The picture ______ on the wall is painted by my nephew.

A. having hung B. hanging C. hangs D. hanged [ B ]

8. Shanghai is ______ the base of China's industry.

A. well-known B. well-known as C. famous D. famous for [ B ]

9. I remember the many times she tried to spell words into my small hand. At last she ______ my understanding.

A. made B. got C. took D. reached [ D ]

10. We ______ each other all the best in the new year.

A. hoped B. wanted C. wished D. expected [ C ]

11. At present some children ________ their parents for whatever they need.

A. ask about B. bring into C. depend on D. reach for [ C ]

12. It was in the room ______ Lu xun was born ______ we had the conference.

A. where, where B. that, that

C. that, where D. where, that [ D ]

13. As much use of time as possible has been made ______ his study.

A. to further B. of furthering

C. of to further D. to furthering [ A ]

14. The old man is still in danger. He is ______ he was yesterday.

A. as well as B. not worse than

C. no better than D. more worse than [ C ]

15. This hall will ______ 3000 people.

A. include B. sit C. hold D. take [ C ]

16. The temperature in greenhouses will be controlled with computers, ______ the weather is like outside.

A. however B. whatever C. no matter how D. what [ B ]

17. Since vegetables are ______ from the wind, rain and insects, they can grow without danger _____ diseases.

A. kept, by B. prevented, of

C. protecting, in D. in proptected, from [ D ]

18. The police ______ the room for finger prints.

A. checked B. tested C. left D. tried [ C ]

19. Can you ______ what life would be like without electricity for a week?

A. think B. imagine C. suppose D. dream [ B ]

20. I didn't follow the ________ printed on the box, and broke the machine.

A. message B. information C. notes D. instructions [ D ]

21. ________ two years to looking after her sick father, she badly needed a holiday.

A. Having devoted B.Devoted

C. To be devoted D. Having been devoted [A]

22. By the end of last year , another new gymnasium ________ in Beijing.

A. would be completed B. was being completed

C. has been completed D. had been completed [ D ]

23. Unless ______ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.

A. invited B. inviting C. was invited D. has invited [A]

24. There's a ______ to one's capacity, so one should not make oneself overtired.

A. relaxation B. contribution C. hesitation D. limitation [D]

25. Your desk is crowded with too many unnecessary things, you have to ______ some of them.

A. remain B. resist C. remove D. renew [C]

26. Social ______ vary greatly from country to country. Remember, ”When in Rome, do as the Romans do."

A. customs B. manners C. habits D. practices [A]

27. You should seize the ______ . It may never come again. [C]

A. lunch B. tip C. opportunity D. information

28. Women were not allowed ______ in the okd Olympics, ____ began around the year 776BC. [ D ]

A. join; it B. to join; that

C. joining; which D. to join; which

29. You should ______ your attention on what your teacher is saying.

A. pay B. draw C. take D. focus [D]

30. Complete the following sentences. What you write must be _____ what you hear. [ B ]

A. basing B. based on C. is based on D. base on

31. It suddenly _____ him that he was not allowed to go there.

A. occurred B. happened C. hit D. got [ C ]

32. ______ , I don't agree with him. [ B ]

A. Telling the truth

B. To tell the truth

C. Tell you the truth

D. To tell truth

33. He is now ____ different John Smith from ______ he was three years ago. [ A ]

A. a; what B. the; the C. a; that D. the; what

34. ---What has made him so unhappy?

--- ________ the ticket for the football match. [ D ]

A. Having been lost B. Being lost

C. Because of losing D.Losing

35. ---I must apologize for ______ ahead of time.

---That's all right. [ B ]

A. letting you not know B. not letting you know

C. letting you know not D. letting not you know

36. He didn't mind ______ TV while he was working on his novel.

A. they watching B. they watch

C. them to watch D. their watching [ D ]

37. The line is busy. I can't ______ although I've tried several times.

A. go through B. get through C. hear from D. ring up [B]

38. That old building was ______ in order that they could build a new apartment house. [ C ]

A. tearing down B. broke down

C. torn down D. breaking down

39. You are lucky to have avoided _______ .

A. to be punished B. punishing

C. punish D. being -punished [D ]

40. Miss Chen's bad habit is ______ without thorough understanding.

A. reads B. reading C. being read D. read [B]

The Third Period

Fill in the blanks according to the contents of units 19-22.

1. How are people's eating habits changing over the years?

2. It was from the early 1990s that the scientists started to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.

3. Chemical fertilisation, for example, helps to produce better crops, but is harmful to the enviroment.

4. Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.

5. The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is the shortage of arable land.

6. Today, many vegetables are not grown in gardens but in greenhouses where they are protected from the wind, rain and insects.

7. In the past there were no trees left in or around the village.

8. To the villager's great joy, the tree and tea crops are also bringing in money to them.

9. Jia Sixie's book is a practical guide to farming.

10. After about three years, her work planting trees had turned barren land green again.

11. I would like to reach a wide audience, though I mostly have adults in mind .

12. My next show will have a part in which I act the role of a scientist, the way that a scientist walks and talks.

13. The actors make us laugh by making fun of somebody's way of dressing or telling an amusing story.

14. What comedians have in common with the player in a comedy is their way of playing with words.

15. Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows , or xiangshaeng shows, have made people all over China roar with laughter for centuries.

16. If you are not fluent in Chinese, you will not catch all of it.

17. I could hear the newly-married couple quarrelling every day over small matters.

18. Learning to speak a foreign language enriches one's life.

19. A yellow car passed me and suddenly cut in right in front of me, as there was another car coming in the other direction.

20. We looked at each other for a moment in great surprise and total silence.

21. You are late for a flight and you want to go ahead of the queue.

22. Making eye contact- looking directly into someone's eyes - is in some countries a way to show interest.

23. A smile can help us get through difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.

24. A smile can open doors and tear down walls.

25. We can smile at ourselves in the mirror to make ourselves feel happier and stronger.

26. Moving the index finger forwards and backwards.

27. I feel like taking a rest. Would you mind my sitting down for a while.

28. When I got home, I found it in a total mass. It took me hours to put my house inorder.

29. The tail will stand straight out from the body..

30. To show friendship, elephants will touch each other with their trunks and stand close to each other, putting their foreheads together.

31. Straight down, then left, across the bridge, walk past the free fall ride and it will be on my left.

32. A theme park is a collection of rides, exhibitions and other attractions that are based on a common theme.

33. What they all have in common is that they combine fun with the opportunity to learn something.

34. The park is divided into two sections.

35. Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland, visitors can take the shattle to the lowlanfd.

36. He cut off the electricity quickly and prevented an accident.

37. The journey begins at the beach and continues down to the bottom of the sea.

38. If you stand at the top of the tower, you get a wonderful view of the coast and the sea.

39. Disney land in Califorria was one of the first theme parks to become popular around the world.

40. What do people do at theme parks, besides looking at exhibitions?

dg15.com延伸阅读

大学库课件(精品十五篇)

教案课件是我们老师的一项重要职责，因此每天老师都会按时按质地编写好教案课件。教案对于实现课程教学目标起着重要的保障作用。如果您正在寻找“大学库课件”相关内容，请查看下面的推荐，建议收藏此页以备后续查阅所需！

大学库课件【篇1】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国著名的教育机构之一，其教育内容和质量在国内外享有高声誉。其中，清华大学的课件也是该校值得关注的一项教育元素。本文就清华大学课件这一话题展开讨论。

首先，清华大学课件的特点是丰富而全面。该校的课件内容涵盖自然科学、社会科学、工程技术、法律经济等众多领域，囊括了大量的现代化、前沿性的知识。在这些课件中，学生可以接触到最新的研究成果和应用成果，促进了他们对知识的理解与掌握。

其次，清华大学课件的特点是具备高度的翻译水平。该校的许多课件被翻译成了多种语言，包括英语、法语等，使得国内外的孔子学院、留学生等也能够在清华大学的课件中深入学习和了解中国的现代化发展、文化与人文底蕴。同时，清华大学课件中的对外汉语教学也备受赞誉，为更多的外国人提供学习汉语的机会。

此外，清华大学课件的特点还在于其实现了教学资源的共享。通过在互联网上提供教学视频、课件下载等一系列资源，学校在极大地推动了教学模式的变革，让学生和教师可以在足不出门的情况下参与到全球范围内知识的共享、交流和合作之中，为全球化教育做出贡献。

不仅如此，清华大学课件在信息交流和互动上也表现出色。学校提供的各种交流平台，让学生、教师和校外人士可以进行线上互动，交流各自的教学和研究成果，促进了学校内部和校外的知识传播。

综上所述，清华大学课件是该校优秀教育资源的重要组成部分，其丰富的内容、高水准的翻译和共享、互动特点都体现了其在教学上所取得的成就，这无疑为该校长期以来与国内外优秀大学的竞争中取得了领先地位。

大学库课件【篇2】

清华大学课件作为高等教育领域的重要资源，不仅代表着清华教育的水准，更是许多学生学习和研究的重要依据。本文将就“清华大学课件”这一主题，从清华大学课件的历史沿革、发展现状、价值特色及应用前景等方面进行论述。

一、清华大学课件的历史沿革

清华大学创建于1911年，历经百年发展，其教育及课程设置、课程教学方法、教育内容等方面均处于国内外领先地位。随着计算机、互联网等信息技术的快速发展，清华大学也积极探索信息技术教育与传授，特别是在 21 世纪初，随着互联网技术普及，清华大学也开始致力于将其教育资源数字化，为师生提供更优质的在线学习体验。在此背景下，清华大学开始陆续推出课件资源分享平台，自此诞生了“清华大学课件”。

二、清华大学课件的发展现状

随着最新的信息技术与课程体系的紧密融合，清华大学课件得以不断迭代更新，课件资源也得到了更加全面和精细的整理。当前，清华大学课件拥有自己的官方网站，为世界各地的学习者提供优质的学习资源。清华大学课件涉及的学科范围广泛，包括了计算机科学、工程、数学、物理学、经济学、文学等多个方向的课程资源。除此之外，清华大学还与国内外很多大学和研究机构合作，共享各类知识和资源。

三、清华大学课件的价值特色

作为清华大学教育的重要组成部分，清华大学课件不仅满足了学生们的学习需求，更具有以下特点：

1.精细化的教学体系：清华大学课件是清华大学近一百年教学体系的人类智慧结晶，其严谨的教学体系是难得一见的国内外知名大学教育资源。

2、全面的学科涵盖：清华大学课件提供的学科方向涵盖了多个领域，并且每个学科涵盖丰富、全面的内容，在为学生提供高端知识和技能的同时，拓宽了学生的知识领域。

3、自由的学习时间：清华大学课件资源是24小时在线免费为学生提供的，每个人都可以选好自己的时间学习，自由度大大增加。

四、清华大学课件的应用前景

目前，清华大学课件已成为各高校和科研机构学习资源的重要来源。伴随着移动互联的逐渐发展，人们的学习方式逐渐从传统班级授课转向线上自习。清华大学课件为这一趋势提供了强有力的支持，为全球学习者提供了一个便捷、高效、精品的学习平台。可以预见，未来，清华大学课件将会在高等教育领域发挥更加重要的作用。

五、结语

综上所述，清华大学课件是清华大学教育资源的一种重要体现，具有严谨的教学体系、全面的学科内容、自由的学习时间以及优秀的应用前景等价值特色。其在线学习平台为全球学习者提供了优秀的学习机会，进而推动了高等教育的普及与更新。

大学库课件【篇3】

一、教学设想：

我所讲的课文选自人教版课程标准实验教材小学语文二年级上册第六单元《假如》一课。

《假如》一诗，借马良的神笔，表达了对小树、小鸟、残疾人的发自内心的关爱。这些关爱，显示了儿童的一颗博大而纯真的心。学诗时，学生可能会产生许多的假如，也可能产生写诗的冲动。这都要建立在关爱之情的基础之上。这篇课文的教学，要启发学生关爱他人，关爱生活，关爱环境。

并且，本组教材的立意所在是“关爱他人”!有必要让学生在启蒙时期，便学习用真情获得真情，用关爱赢得关爱!这里有体现强烈情感对比的对子;有表现同学之间友爱的文章;有表现关心有困难的人的日记;有体现热爱家乡、珍惜友情的古诗。每篇课文都饱含着爱的真情。这是一组很好的能培养学生爱心，获得美好人生体验的情感教育素材。应引导学生反复朗读和调动学生的生活见闻，感知教材，感悟社会，关心社会。

认识9个生字，能正确、流利、有感情的朗读课文。

2、过程与方法目标：

通过学生自学、交流、合作，让学生自主识字，感悟课文，领会阅读方法。

3、情感、态度、价值观目标：

陶冶美好的的情操，有关爱他人、关爱环境的愿望。

我觉得启蒙时期的儿童天真纯净的如一泓清泉。他们欢快流动的过程，就是体验人生，感悟自然的过程，是花蕾含苞正放的过程。

我们二年级的儿童经过一年的学习，已对识字方法、朗读方法有一定的了解和掌握，因此，这部分内容是儿童原有认知基础上的教学，并且，孩子能够明白在生活中我们要去关爱他人，因为每一个儿童都有一颗博大而纯真的心，儿童充满了想象力、创造力，他们希望认识社会、改造自然。在儿童的心灵里，有着赤子般的真情，有着火山喷发般的力量。在《假如》一诗中，他们的愿望借助“马良的神笔”得到了实现。虽然他们往往只能“假如”，但是这些“假如”都是他们对生活、对大自然的独特认识，是他们对美好事物的向往和追求。

如果没有课程资源的广泛支持，再美好的课程设想也将变成一纸空文。因此，我们教师必须开发和利用好这无所不在的课程资源，为我们的语文教学服务。由此，我课前制作了多媒体课件，并借助课件及音乐资源等进行直观教学，帮助理解文意，激发学生的学习兴趣，使课堂充满亲和力，洋溢着快乐与情趣，也是为了让学生学的轻松，学的快乐。

我认为，理想的课堂，就像一座强大的磁场，正如乌申斯基说的：“如果最初的教学充满了形象、色彩、声音，总之，能被儿童多种感官所接受，这时，我们就使自己所讲授的知识被儿童所接受。”所以，我们教师必须为学生创设一定的情境，烘托气氛，产生悬念，激起学生的兴趣和求知欲。如“课件的演示，小老师的尝试、音乐基调的熏陶与感染”等，都能够不断的启发学生的思维，体现人文关怀。

语文教学重要的是教会学生如何学习，如何掌握学习的方法自己学习。如本课中：识字时，我让学生说一说你是用什么方法记住这些字的?读文时，让学生去自学、感悟、理解、交流、探究。学生只有掌握了学习方法，日后才能依次类推、或举一反三、或有所创新，形成自学能力。

《语文课程标准》指出“要珍视学生是独特感受、体验和理解”。的确，我们面对的是活生生、有血、有肉、有情感的孩子，他们的体验绝不容我们忽视。因此，我让学生联系自己谈谈对这篇“寓意深刻”的诗歌的独自想法，培养学生的想象力、创造力。尊重学生的体验和感受，让学生在独自的体验中健康的成长为有想法、有情意、有个性的人，有关爱弱势群体的愿望。

大学库课件【篇4】

选择

Nowadays, young people have more choices than any generation before them. They can choose what they want to study, where they want to live, whom they want to marry and how they want to live their life in general. However, having too many choices can sometimes be overwhelming and lead to indecision. In this essay, we will discuss the concept of choice overload, how it affects decision-making and what can be done to mitigate its negative effects.

The concept of choice overload has been extensively studied by psychologists and marketers alike. In the famous jam experiment, conducted by psychologists Sheena Iyengar and Mark Lepper, customers at a supermarket were given a choice between 24 different flavors of jam or 6 different flavors of jam. Interestingly, while more people stopped to sample the jams when there were 24 options, fewer people actually made a purchase compared to when there were only 6 options. This study and others like it have shown that having too many choices can lead to decision fatigue, as well as regret about missed opportunities.

So, how do we mitigate the negative effects of choice overload? One way is to actively limit our choices. For example, before going to a restaurant, we can research the menu and decide what we want to order beforehand. This eliminates the need to choose from a large menu under time pressure. Another way is to categorize and prioritize our options, such as by making a list of pros and cons or ranking the choices by importance.

In conclusion, choice overload is a modern phenomenon that can be both a blessing and a curse. While having more choices can offer us the freedom to live our lives on our own terms, it can also lead to decision paralysis and regret. The key is to find a balance between too many options and too few, and to actively manage our choices to reduce the negative side effects.

大学库课件【篇5】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国最顶尖的大学之一，其所授课程涵盖了众多领域，如工程、科学、人文等。这些课程中的一些内容已经被整理成了清华大学课件，以方便学生们进行学习。在这篇文章中，我们将讨论以下主题：“清华大学课件的概述、清华大学课件的优劣、清华大学课件的改进点”。

一、清华大学课件的概述

清华大学课件是由清华大学教育技术中心制作的一种教学工具。清华大学教育技术中心的理念是利用现代信息技术手段支持现代教育，提高教学质量和效率。由此，清华大学课件应运而生。

目前，清华大学课件涵盖了大部分的知识领域。学生可以通过清华大学课件在线学习，也可以下载到本地进行学习。它的优点是可以在学生离开教室或图书馆的情况下自主学习，而且学生可以在自己的节奏和时间里学习。

二、清华大学课件的优劣

在使用清华大学课件期间，我们可以看到它的优缺点。下面是它的优势和劣势：

优势：

1.具有便携性：清华大学课件可以在线或离线进行学习，可以随时随地使用。

2. 自主性：学生可以自主安排学习的时间和地点，学习速度也可以由学生自主决定。

3. 对老师的支持：课件能够帮助老师进行教学，可以让老师提高教学质量和效率。

4. 多媒体性：清华大学课件不仅具有文字和图片，还包括音频、视频等多媒体资料，可以让学生多角度地学习。

缺点：

1.没有互动性：清华大学课件是单向的，无法和学生互动。

2. 内容重复：有些内容可能在课件中和在书中重复，浪费学生的时间。

3.缺少诱发兴趣的元素：有些课程内容可能需要一些额外的参考资料或额外的材料，来诱发学生的兴趣。

三、清华大学课件的改进点

清华大学课件的缺点也让我们看到了它的改进空间。我们可以通过改进点，来优化清华大学课件。

1. 增加互动性。清华大学课件应该增加与学生的互动元素，使学生能够参与到教学中去。

2. 符合学生成长的需求。清华大学课件应该符合学生的能力水平和知识背景，不应该过于深入或过于浅薄。

3. 增加视听材料的数量和质量。清华大学课件应该加入更多的视听材料，以吸引学生的注意力。

4. 增加知识元素的多样性。清华大学课件应该增加一些新颖的知识元素，以增加学生的兴趣。

结论

清华大学课件是清华大学教育技术中心为学生提供的一种有效的教学工具。它方便了学生的学习，提高了教学效率。尽管它有一些缺点，但是清华大学教育技术中心还是在努力改进，使它能够更好地服务于学生的学习。

大学库课件【篇6】

The Importance of Learning English in College

English is an international language that is spoken and used everywhere in the world. It is recognized as the global language of communication, business, science, and education. In this context, learning English is increasingly becoming essential for college students who want to build successful careers in the global arena. In this essay, I will discuss the importance of learning English in college and how it can help students achieve their goals.

Firstly, learning English is important to students because it is the language of instruction in most universities worldwide. In order to succeed in their college education, students must be able to understand lectures, read academic texts, and write research papers in English. Moreover, most scientific and academic journals are written in English, making it the language of choice for research and scientific discovery. Therefore, it is essential for college students to have a good command of English in order to excel in their academic pursuits.

Secondly, learning English can improve students’ job prospects and career opportunities. Many multinational companies and organizations require their employees to have strong English language skills. Being proficient in English can open doors to a wide range of job opportunities and career paths that are not available to those who are not fluent in the language. Additionally, English is the language of global business, commerce, and trade. Consequently, having English language skills can give college graduates an edge in business negotiations, marketing, and international trade.

Thirdly, learning English can broaden students’ cultural horizons and enhance their personal growth. English is a language of culture, literature, music, and art. Learning it can expose students to the world’s diverse cultures and help them appreciate different perspectives. English language skills can also facilitate social and cultural interactions with people from different backgrounds, making college life more meaningful and enjoyable.

In conclusion, learning English is a necessary and valuable investment for college students. It can facilitate academic success, career growth, and personal development. Therefore, students should take advantage of every opportunity to improve their English skills, whether it be through language classes, practicing reading and writing, or engaging in conversations with English speakers. By doing so, they will be equipped with the skills and knowledge needed to succeed in an increasingly competitive and globalized world.

大学库课件【篇7】

教学目标：

一片自然的风景，就是一个心灵的世界。散文，是作者的内心独白，读散文，要随着作者笔下的文字走进那片世界，感受作者的所见所闻，体察作者的所思所感。

l 这个地点在以后我的生涯中总是被我反复回忆咀嚼吟味，我总是无法忘记它。仿佛它是我人生的答案。

l 三条巨流般的黑戈壁，平平地铺向三个可怕的远方。三个方向都像可怕的暗示。

l 汉家寨，如一枚被人丢弃的棋子，如一粒生锈的弹丸，孤零零地存在于这巨大得恐怖的大自然中。

l 老小二人都是汉人服色，一瞬间我明白了，这地方确实叫汉家寨。

l 砦就是寨，都是人紧守的地方。

l 无论我走到哪里，都在不知不觉间，坚守着什么。我只觉得它与汉家寨这地名天衣无缝。

3、秦牧《散文创作谈》：“用一根红线穿起生活的珍珠，珍珠才不会遍地乱滚，这才能成为整齐的珠串。”

1、举三反一，课外阅读散文，进一步体会散文红线串珠、形散神聚的特点。

大学库课件【篇8】

清华大学课件

作为中国最顶尖的高等教育机构之一，清华大学一直致力于提供卓越的教育和培养优秀的人才。在这个过程中，清华大学的教授们使用的课件也在不断更新、改进和创新。本文将着重讨论清华大学课件的相关主题，包括其优点、缺点以及如何让清华大学课件更加高效地促进教学效果。

清华大学课件的优点

首先，清华大学课件有一个显著的优点是，其内容多样、丰富。清华大学的教授经常使用各种媒介和科技手段，以更好地展示教学内容。清华大学课件不仅可以简洁明了地展示知识点，还可用于演示数据、图片、视频等形式的资料，使学生更直观地理解教学内容。

其次，清华大学课件在设计上更加人性化、易懂易学。相比传统的讲解方式，清华大学课件更加灵活，能够针对不同学习者的需求进行调整。震动效果、动画、互动内容等也能激发学生的兴趣，增加学生参与度。此外，清华大学的教授们也会通过多种渠道及时收集学生反馈，根据学生反馈再对课件进行改进和完善，以让学生更加顺畅地掌握知识。

清华大学课件的缺点

尽管清华大学课件有很多优点，但它仍有一些缺点。其中一个缺点是冗长的内容让学生容易失去耐心。有些教授制作的课件过多精力放在了排版、图片等美学元素上，而忽略了核心内容。此外，清华大学课件也可能存在内容繁杂、难度过高等问题，无法满足学生的实际需求。为了克服这些问题，教授们应当加强对课件的可读性和语言表达的精炼性，以及对难度水平的优化。

如何让清华大学课件更高效地促进教学效果

让清华大学课件更高效地促进教学效果，需要教授们在多方面进行努力，包括修订和完善课件的内容，设计和创新新的传授和评估方法以及教学质量的监督和反馈等方面。

首先，教授们应该精简冗长的课件内容，重点突出，将核心内容优先展示。同时，要做好知识点之间内在联系的表述，强调重点难点链接和详尽解释。

其次，教授们应受重视社交学生之间的相互沟通, 以完善新的传授和评估方法并建立在学生间和教授间的双向沟通和反馈系统，以此并在每一学期调整和优化课堂效果。

最后，教授们应以学生需求为中心，努力锻炼学生的自学和探索能力，在激发学生兴趣的同时，鼓励学生探索新的知识领域和应用方式，不断拓展知识领域和深度。

总结：

从以上讨论可以看出，清华大学课件在不断更新和改进中保持了许多优点，但是它也存在一些缺点和需要改进的地方。对于教授们来说，他们可以从减少冗长、增强可读性和语言表达的精炼性，优化难度水平等方面下手，以更好的方式促进教学效果。同时，现代科技手段和社交媒体已经被广泛应用于教育领域，从而使得清华大学内的课件和教育更加直观、自由、灵活和互动。在未来的教学过程中，学生和教授可以相互协作，充分发挥技术的优势，促进教学环境和质量的不断提高，并且在游戏化教育和人工智能等新技术的帮助下，让清华大学课件不断创新，为学生们提供更加优质的学习体验。

大学库课件【篇9】

教学目标：

能够运用已有的生活经验和学习经验，以自己喜爱的方式表现美妙的清晨，并通过聆听、演唱、表演等多种活动的参与更进一步激起心中对生活的热爱。

教学重点、难点：

1、学生运用已有的生活经验和学习经验，以自己喜爱的方式表现美妙的清晨.

2、通过各种活动的参与进一步激起心中对生活的热爱.

3、指导学生唱准歌曲《清晨》第四段中的大跳音准。

2、出示两幅日出图片。

3、给学生聆听两段不同情绪的音乐，选择哪段音乐与画面更相配。

这首歌曲给你怎样的感觉？你觉得它描绘了一幅怎样的画面？

（1）复听清晨音乐，跟老师做一些简单而又轻松的律动。

（2）跟音乐用“绿”哼唱歌曲旋律。歌曲可以分几个部分？

（3）学生用竖笛自学歌曲的第一部分16个小节的曲调，也可以通过自己视唱来自学。

（4）教师通过范唱和范奏的方法教学歌曲第二部分的曲调，重点指导好第一乐句的大跳音程的音准。

（5）省略第二段，直接将1、3、4段曲调连起来唱。

四、课堂小结。

大学库课件【篇10】

教学目标 1、会认 9 个生字。

2、通过多种形式的读书活动,学生把课文读正确,读流利,读出感情,在读中品味词语,积累语言,有所感悟。

3、培养学生关爱他人、关爱环境、关爱生活的美好愿望,并向往和追求美好的事物。

4、能展开丰富的想象力，根据本文诗句的格式仿写、续写。

重点难点 1、学生能正确流利有感情地朗读课文，并在品读中能激发学生的同情心、爱心，启发学生关爱他人、关爱生活、关爱环境。

2、根据本文诗句的格式仿写、续写自己想说的话，表达自己的情感。

教学过程一、故事导入，情感铺垫 1、孩子们，你们想听神笔马良的故事吗?(播放视频)故事听完了，有谁知道马良的这支笔有什么神奇的地方呀?(指名说) 2、师：你听得真认真!马良啊就用这支神笔帮助了很多很多的人，实现了他心中的愿望。你想有一支这样的神笔吗?(生：想) 3、师：有一个小朋友啊，也想有一支神笔，她要用神笔画什么呢?我们一块来听听。

(出示课件：师读，配音乐) 4、师：孩子们，刚才我读的这篇课文就是今天要共同学习的第 10 课《假如》(板书课题)。

师：一起读读题目(注意读出诗意) 二、自主学习，整体感知 1、师：这篇课文是一首小诗，那么孩子们你们想不想读读这首诗呀?(生：答)想就拿起书，用你喜欢的方式认真地读一读，读的时候要把字音读准确，课文读通顺，开始读吧!读完的小朋友就可以坐好了。

2、师：同学们读得可认真了，不知道上节课所学的词语宝宝你们还认识吗?(生：答)那好，下面请一小组的同学开火车读词语。

(课件展示词语：寒冷袭击觅食哭泣快乐叹息饥饿谷粒双腿不幸) 3、师：同学们的表现可真棒啊!表扬自己!现在请大家认真地看看课文，比较一下这四个小节，看看你有什么发现呢?一个小朋友有发现了，好多个小朋友有发现了，谁愿意来说说。(生：答) 课件展示：假如|我|有一支|马良的|神笔 4、好，我们一起把这句话读一遍。(生齐读)我想问问同学们真的有神笔吗?(生：答)没有，这只不过是我们的一种什么呀?(生：想像)那你有过想像吗?(生：答) 5、那这句话你能不能读得让我们感受到你是在想像着能有一支神笔呀?(生：答)能啊，谁愿意读读。(指名读) 6、好，现在同学们听老师来读读，你觉得哪一种读法更容易把你带入到想像的世界中去，听好了，(第一种，第二种) 7、第二种啊，那跟着老师来读读好不好(指名读)对了，如果在假如的后面稍微停顿一下，让我们觉得好像在思考什么就更好了，再试试吧!(齐读) 三、读悟结合，体验情感 1、那么小作者有了马良的神笔要帮助谁呢?(指名回答) 教师板书：出示图画(神笔，小树，小鸟，西西)

谁能用一句话连起来说一说，小作者用神笔帮助谁，谁，还有谁?(指名回答) 3、说得对，让我们先来看看小作者是怎样帮助小树的吧!(出示第一节) 学习第一节 (1)、谁来读读课文的第一小节。(课件展示第一节内容)孩子们，那你们知道小作者是怎样帮助小树的呢?(板书：太阳云朵)那小作者为什么要给小树画太阳和云朵呢?(用课文的语句回答) (解释：袭击) (2)师：寒冷的冬天来了，大雪纷飞，你觉得小树受到了怎样地袭击呢?(课件展示)(指名回答) (3)(课件展示)孤零零的小树站在外面被北风吹着，被雪花打着，冻得它浑身发抖。孩子们假如你就是这棵小树，你现在的内心有什么感受呀?(指名回答) (4)孩子们你们说的小作者都听到了，所以小作者说(课件出示：我要给窗前----白白的云朵。师指导读这句诗。)好了，有了小作者的帮助，大家快看(出示课件)金色的太阳，白白的云朵，小树呀它得到了温暖。它挺了挺腰，伸了伸胳膊，摆了摆头，多快乐呀! (5)小树变得快乐了，那小作者心情怎样?(很快乐)，我们的心里(也很快乐)就让我们快乐地读读小作者的美好心愿吧!(指名读——齐读) (6)有了小作者的帮助，小树变得快乐了，那么小鸟和西西，小作者又是怎样帮助他们的呢?现在我们来看看课文的第二小节和第三小节，男同学来读第二小节，女同学来读第三小节。(教师指导朗读) 学习第二节：

(1)小作者是怎样帮助小鸟的呢?你们知道吗?(生：谷粒)(课件出示第二节诗) (2)那么小作者为什么要给小鸟画谷粒?用课文中的语句回答(课件出示第二节诗)，(解释：“觅食”) (3)如果现在你就是饿坏了的小鸟，在等妈妈找食回来，你在窝里饿得喳喳地直哭，那你会喳喳地说什么呀?(指名回答) (4)假如我们看到了小鸟，你愿意帮助它吗?愿意关心它吗?请把你对小鸟的爱护和关心读出来吧!(学生推荐读，你们最想谁来读?谁能读得更好呢?(指名读)我们拿起书一快来表达出对小鸟的爱——齐读)(师指导：带着想像的翅膀去读) 学习第三节诗 (1)得到大家的帮助以后，小树和小鸟都变得开心起来，那么小作者又要用神笔给不幸的朋友西西画什么了?(板书：好腿) (2)对呀，西西没有一双健康的好腿，他不能和我们干什么?(一起跑步、一起跳舞、一起做游戏)他只能坐在哪儿?(指导读)哎!他多痛苦呀!可是现在他有了一双好腿，西西可以和我们一起赛跑、可以和我们一起打球，还可以和我们一起干什么? (3)看到西西这么快乐，大家开不开心?(生：开心)好，女生来读读第三小节，表达出对西西的祝福吧!女生读得真有感情，把对西西的祝福融入了朗读中，我看男生们也跃跃欲试了，那你们也带着对西西美好的祝福来试试吧。(课件展示第三小节) 四、自主积累，提升情感 1、小作者真是个有爱心的孩子。她不但给空前的小树画了个金色的太阳，给树上的小鸟画了许多好吃的谷粒，还给西西画了一双好腿。这三个愿望是多么美好啊! 2、小作者的愿望只有这三个吗?(生：答)你从哪里读出来的?课件展示)(感悟文末的省略号)对，小作者还有很多很多的愿望。

3、他没有给自己画漂亮的衣服，也没有给自己画好玩的玩具，而是用神笔帮助我们身边的植物朋友、动物朋友，还有人类朋友。那么小作者觉得快乐吗?(板书：帮助别人就是快乐

自己)假如你也有一支马良的神笔，你要给谁画什么呢?你能用上像我们小作者诗一样的语言来说说吗?把想说的话写下来吧!课件展示：假如我有一支马良的神笔，我要给( )画( )，让( ) 4、你们和小作者一样都是很有爱心的孩子，接下来带着你们的爱，带着你们的祝福，再来读读这首小诗好不好?(学生站起读)老师给你们配上好听的音乐。(齐读) 【结束语】(课件展示)帮助别人就是快乐自己，假如老师有一支马良的神笔，我要给善良的小朋友画一对翅膀，带着你的爱，带着你的情，飞向蔚蓝的天空，飞向地球的每一个角落。

五、作业 1、背诵诗歌。

2、课外阅读儿童诗，准备召开一次诗歌朗诵会。

大学库课件【篇11】

清华大学课件

清华大学是中国著名的高等教育机构，位于北京市海淀区颐和园西北侧，是中国最顶尖的学府之一。清华大学的教育教学质量一直备受社会关注，而清华大学课件是提高教育教学质量的一项重要举措。本文就清华大学课件这一主题进行探讨。

一、清华大学课件的发展历程

清华大学的课件发展可以追溯到上个世纪90年代初期。当时，清华大学电子工程系的教师陆继明博士自行设计开发了一套讲义和实验指导书。这套指导书基于Windows 3.1平台，采用了菜单式界面和图形化操作，可以方便地查看课程内容和实验指导。在陆教授的指导下，电子工程系的多名教职员工开始使用这套课件进行教学。

随着计算机技术的不断发展，课件的功能和界面也得到了不断改进。1997年，清华大学启用了新的教育技术研究中心，为清华大学课件的研发提供了更好的机会和平台。在教育技术研究中心的指导下，清华大学的多名教师和学生开始研发各种课件，如数学、物理、计算机等多个学科。

进入新的千年，伴随着网络技术和移动设备的发展，清华大学课件的发展也进入了一个新的阶段。从2000年代中期开始，清华大学开始使用互联网进行课件教学。同时，清华大学的多名研究人员还开展了基于移动设备的课件研究。

二、清华大学课件的特点

1. 图形化界面设计

清华大学课件的一个显著特点就是优美的图形化界面设计。无论是PPT形式的课件，还是基于互联网的在线课件，都注重色彩搭配、布局合理和美观易用等方面。在这方面，清华大学的设计师们一直领先于其他高校。

2. 多媒体教学形式

清华大学课件采用了多媒体教学形式，涵盖了多种表达方式。除了文字和图表外，音频、动画和视频等多种形式也得到广泛应用。这种以学生为中心的教学方式，可以更加有效地激发学生的学习兴趣，增强学生的理解能力。

3. 互动性强

清华大学课件注重互动性强，学生在学习中可以使用课件的互动功能与教师进行交流。比如，学生可以使用课件的笔记功能随时记录笔记，可以在教师设置的互动页面参与讨论，可以在网上提交作业等。

三、清华大学课件的应用与优势

清华大学课件已经成为这所高校教学中不可或缺的一部分，覆盖了从本科到研究生等多个教学阶段。清华大学的教师利用课件辅助教学，可以更好地满足学生的实际需求，提高课程的针对性和实用性。同时，清华大学课件把多媒体、互动性和智能化技术融为一体，有效地改善了传统的教学模式，提高了学生知识的掌握能力和应用能力。

总之，清华大学课件的发展历史十分悠久，其特点和应用优势也非常显著。随着互联网和移动设备的不断普及，清华大学课件将继续发挥着重要的作用，为高校教育教学提供更加全面、便捷、优质的服务。

大学库课件【篇12】

【学习目标】

1.积累文学常识。

2.理解文意，准确翻译。掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式。

3.分析本文的论证特点。

4.理解文章表达的思想及现实意义。

【重点难点】

重点：目标1、2、3

难点：目标3、4

【课时数】一课时

【教学过程】

一、导入

“修身、齐家、治国、平天下”，是中国古代圣贤智慧的结晶，那古代中国人到底是如何连接自我、家族、民族、国家和天下观念的呢？今天我们学习选自《礼记大学》的一段文字，感受古代圣贤的智慧。

二、题解

“大学之道”，意思是大学的宗旨，大学的最终目的。“大学”，在古代指与“小学”相对的“大人之学”。古代儿童八岁上小学，主要学习“洒扫、应对、进退、礼乐射御书数”之类的文化课和基本的礼节。十五岁后可进入大学，开始学习伦理、政治、哲学等“穷理正心，修己治人”的学问。道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

三、文学常识

1.《礼记》又名《小戴礼记》、《小戴记》，成书于汉代，为西汉礼学家戴圣所编。《礼记》是中国古代一部重要的典章制度选集，书中内容主要写先秦的礼制，体现了先秦儒家的哲学思想（如天道观、宇宙观、人生观）、教育思想（如个人修身、教育制度、教学方法、学校管理）、政治思想（如以教化政、大同社会、礼制与刑律）、美学思想（如物动心感说、礼乐中和说），是研究先秦社会的重要资料，是一部儒家思想的资料汇编。

2.《大学之道》出自《礼记》，是《礼记》四十九篇中的第四十二篇。宋代以前，《大学》一直从属于《礼记》。朱熹将《大学》从《礼记》中抽取出来，为《大学》《中庸》做章句，为《论语》《孟子》做集注，把它们编在一起，做《四书章句集注》，经此，《大学》与《中庸》《论语》《孟子》合称为“四书”，并被确立“四书之首”的地位。

四、研习文本。

（一）自主学习

请借助注释及工具书，自主翻译文章，在课本上标注重要词语。并记下疑难问题。

指导学生重点学习以下词语：

1.道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

2.明明德：第一个“明”是动词，彰显、发扬之意。第二个“明”是形容词，含有高尚、光辉的意思。

3.亲民：亲近。一说是“新民”，使人弃旧因新，弃恶扬善。

4.止：至，到。

5.知止：知道目标所在。

6.静：心不妄动。

7.安：所处而安，性情安和。

8.虑：思虑精详。

9.得：处事全宜。

10.齐其家：使家族中的各种关系整齐有序。人与人之间的关系和谐，家业繁荣。

11.修其身：修养自己的德行。

12.致其知：获得知识。一说，把自己对事物的认识推到极致。

13.格物：推究事物的原理。

14.庶人：普通百姓。

15.壹是皆以修身为本：壹是：一律，一概。本：本源、根本。

（二）合作解疑

1.在小组内交流展示学习成果，以句为单位，口头翻译，每人主讲一句。

2.针对自主学习过程中遇到的疑难，讨论探究，尝试解决。

【参考译文】

《大学》的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于使人达到完善的境界。知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动；心地不妄动，则性情安和；性情安和，则思虑精详，思虑精详则处事合宜。凡物都有根本有末节，凡事都有终结有开始，明白了本末始终的先后顺序，就接近《大学》的道理了。

古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。要想治理好自己国家的人，先要管理好自己的家庭；要想管理好自己家庭的人，先要修养好自身的德行；要想修养好自身德行的人，先要端正自己的心意；要想端正自己心意的人，先要使自己的心意真诚；要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要使自己获取知识；获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。明白了事物的原理后才能对外物的事理认识充分，对外物的事理认识充分后才能心意真诚，心意真诚后才能心思端正，心思端正后才能修养好德行，德行修养好后才能管理好家庭，家庭管理好后才能治理好国家，国家治理好后天下才能太平。从天子到普通百姓，都要把修养德行作为根本。

（三）全员解疑

由各小组提出疑问，全班同学和老师一起解决问题。

以交流解疑巩固学习成果。

五、探究思考

（一）第一段重点写了什么内容？

指出大学的宗旨，提出了大学的“三纲”：明明德、亲民、止于至善。

首先，《大学》对儒学作了一个高度概括，提出“明明德，在亲民，在止于至善”三项，即宋代儒家们所说的大学“三纲领”。这一概括非常准确地揭示了儒学的基本精神，也道出了《大学》的主旨。《大学》是讲治国平天下的学问，但是它按照孔子思想，不就事论事，而是将人的精神的弘扬和品德修养置于首位。“明明德”是发扬自己固有的德性，是激发求学者完善自己的自觉性，而不是用某种外在的、固定的道德准则束缚自己。“亲民”即“新民”，就是不仅自觉地进行自我修养，而且努力提高全体人民的道德品质，在儒家看来这是为治国平天下的伟业奠定精神基础。“止于至善”就是要将自己的道德品质和社会、国家的治理提升到最完美的地步，不达到最理想的境界绝不停止，实际上是一个无限的完善过程。

明明德、亲民、止于至善，既是《大学》的纲领旨趣，也是儒学“垂世立教”的目标所在。

（二）第一段的三句话之间是什么关系？

首句开宗明义，提出大学之道的“三纲”，第二、三句承接上文对如何达到大学之道，阐明其中的逻辑关系，为下文引出八条目做准备。

（三）第二段重点写了“八目”，包括哪些内容？

第二段提出“八目”：格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身、齐家、治国、平天下。

（四）“八目”之间是什么关系？

“格物、致知”为第一步，对应的是知的功夫；“诚意、正心、修身”为第二步，对应的是修的功夫；“齐家、治国、平天下”是第三步，对应的是用的功夫。“格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身”是修己，“齐有、治国、平天下”是安人。

（五）“三纲”“八目”之间的关系是怎样的？

“三纲”是宗旨，是纲领，是指导思想，“八目”是实现“三纲”的具体步骤。它们是一个不可分割的整体。

（六）请简要分析本文的论证特点

1.论证结构严谨，条理清晰。先提出表明宗旨的“三纲”，然后提出实现“三纲”的具体步骤，说明治国平天下和个人道德修养的一致性。浑然一体，结构严谨，条理清晰。

2.运用排比、顶真手法，论证力强。句式整齐，节奏分明，增强了语势，具有无可辩驳的力量。

六、诵读，加深理解。

七、小结。

《大学之道》提出“三纲”“八目”，强调修身是根本，修身的目的是治国平天下，说明治国平天下和个人修养的一致性。

通过学习，我们可以得知，在长期占据中国封建统治思想主导地位的儒家文化中，修身、齐家、治国、平天下乃文人志士之所向往，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下联系密切。“爱人者，人恒爱之；敬人者，人恒敬之。”不歧视他人，人不与之立异。在古代中国人看来，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下并无具体刻意化分割，因而得以连接。

八、布置作业

1.拓展阅读《礼记》部分章节，积累名句。

2.思考：当今社会，我们如何借鉴学习“八目”的内容？

大学库课件【篇13】

(4)按照教材教法要求撰写，条理清晰，书写工整，内容包括教学目标，重难点，教学准备，教学过程，作业要求及板书设计等，力求体现教学形象性，直观性和实践性。

知识与技能：了解日用产品设计的基础知识，知道从日用产品的造型、色彩、材质、功能四个方面加以分析，形成初步的设计意识。

过程与方法：欣赏优秀的日用产品设计作品，了解产品设计的主要特征，尝试用语言或文字从设计的角度进行评述，分析产品设计的成功与不足之处，尝试进行多种形式的设计和制作练习。

情感态度价值观：有学习愿望，能积极思考，具有求新求变的能力。

学会从功能、材质、造型、色彩四个方面欣赏、评述日用产品。

激发学生的学习热情，培养学生的设计思维与审美能力。

多媒体课件、教科书，新颖奇特的日用品;

教师展示切苹果的神器，让学生猜这有什么好处?学生猜，讨论。从而引指出我们的生活离不开设计，引出今天的课题《美观又实用的日用产品》

生活中处处有设计，处处有奇思妙想，请同学们欣赏一组德国厨房里工具的巧妙设计的图片。

提问：这样的设计有哪些优点?哪些不足?你觉得怎样设计才能更完美。并要求学生欣赏图片并以小组的形式进行讨论，选出一名代表进行发言。

学生回答，教师总结并予以肯定(例如：德国厨房中的厨具都体现了“以人为本”的设计理念，在注重实用的同时，更人性化，用起来更贴心。青花瓷盘在考虑到实用的基础上，把全世界闻名的青花瓷以最美的感受展示给大家，给人以美的享受。)

教师：中国是四大文明古国之一，古代人的聪明才智在当时是世界领先的，看看古代哪些生活用品中充满了无穷的智慧。例如：红漆花形洗子，你能看出它造型上的优美和实用性吗?

学生回答，教师总结并予以肯定(漆型洗子是利用自然界的花瓣的形状作为创作的原型，利用中国红在色彩上很鲜艳，非常美观。)

教师提问：通过欣赏古今中外优秀的生活用品，设想一下，如果你是设计师，你会考虑哪几方面进行设计?

学生回答，教师总结(首先要有实用性，其次要有艺术性，二者相结合就是最佳设计)

教师通过播放多媒体视屏的方式让同学感受旧物改造的好处以及方式方法。并讲解注意事项。

布置任务：设计作品可以在造型、色彩、及实用性上多加考虑，设计体现个性的出独一无二的作品。用我们学过的或自己喜欢的方法创作。

(教师巡视指导过程中针对共同存在的问题，及时指出，及时纠正。表扬有创意的作品;对个别学生进行技法指导。)

同学们一小组的形式派出代表发言，评价主要围绕着造型色彩和实用性展开。

教师向学生推荐一下中央二台的《交换空间》这个栏目，里面有许多设计师将他们优秀的设计，展示给我们，有时间的时候大家可以借鉴学习一下，你会变得更加智慧。我们的生活中处处有创意设计，我们离不开设计，同学们让我们都打开脑洞，把身边已经过时的生活用品来一次大改造，或者作为设计者，有更多更好的发明设计出现在我们班的同学中，为生活服务、装点生活。

大学库课件【篇14】

【学习目标】

1、积累文学常识。

2、掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式，理解文意，准确翻译。

3、理解“三纲”“八目”的具体所指及其内部关联。

【重点难点】

1、掌握文中重要的文言词语和特殊句式。

2、理解“三纲”“八目”的具体所指及其内部关联。

【课时数】两课时

【教学过程】

一、题解

“大学之道”，意思是大学的宗旨，大学的最终目的。

“大学”一词在古代有两种含义：一是“博学”的意思；二是相对于小学而言的“大人之学”。

古人八岁入小学，学习“洒扫应对进退、礼乐射御书数”等文化基础知识和礼节；十五岁入大学，学习伦理、政治、哲学等学问。第二种含义同样也有“博学”的意思。

二、文学常识

《礼记》，成书于汉代，为西汉礼学家戴圣所编。《礼记》是中国古代一部重要的典章制度选集，书中内容主要写先秦的礼制，是一部儒家思想的资料汇编。

《大学之道》出自《礼记》。宋代以前，《大学》一直从属于《礼记》。《大学》与《中庸》《论语》《孟子》合称为“四书”，并被确立“四书之首”的地位。

三、研习文本

（一）自主学习

大学之道，在明明德，在亲民，在止于至善。知止而后有定，定而后能静，静而后能安，安而后能虑，虑而后能得。物有本末，事有终始，知所先后，则近道矣。

[注释]

1、道：本指道路，在这里指的是在学习政治、哲学时所掌握的规律和原则。

2、明明德：第一个“明”是动词，彰明、彰显。第二个“明”是形容词，美好。

3、亲民：亲近爱抚民众。一说是“新民”，使人去旧立新，去恶向善。

4、止：至、到。

5、知止：知道目标所在，知道要达到的“至善”境界。

6、静：心不妄动。

7、安：性情安和。

8、虑：思虑精详。

9、得：处事合宜。

[译文]

大学的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于达到道德修养的最高境界。知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动；心不妄动，则性情安和；性情安和，则思虑精详；思虑精详，则处事合宜。凡物都有根本有末节，凡事都有终结有开始，明白了本末始终的先后顺序，就接近《大学》的道理了（也译为“就接近了事物发展的规律”）。

本

指事字，从木，“一”标明树根。

《说文解字》：“本，木下曰本”。

草木的根——根本、根源——本来、本意——本钱——自己方面的。

君子务本，本立而道生。（根本、根源）

本厂、本国（自己方面的）

末

指事字，从木，从一。木指一棵树，上面一横表示树梢所在的位置。

《说文解字》：“末，木上曰末。”

树梢——微小的、不重要的（树梢细微）——粉末——末端（树梢在顶端）——末尾（时间上在后的）

本末倒置（树梢）

细枝末节（微小的、不重要的）

强弩之末（末尾）

古之欲明明德于天下者，先治其国。欲治其国者，先齐其家。欲齐其家者，先修其身。欲修其身者，先正其心。欲正其心者，先诚其意。欲诚其意者，先致其知。致知在格物。物格而后知至，知至而后意诚，意诚而后心正，心正而后身修，身修而后家齐，家齐而后国治，国治而后天下平。自天子以至于庶人，壹是皆以修身为本。

[注释]

1、齐其家：使家族中的各种关系整齐有序，人与人之间的关系和谐，家业繁荣。

齐，使……整齐有序。

2、修其身：修养自己的德行。

3、正：使……端正。

4、诚：使……真诚。意：心意。

5、致其知：获得知识。一说，把自己对事物的认识推到极致。

6、格物：推究事物的原理。格：推究。

7、庶人：普通百姓。

8、壹是：一律，一概。本：本源、根本。

[译文]

古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。要想治理好自己国家的人，先要使家族中的各种关系整齐有序。要想使家族中的各种关系整齐有序的人，先要修养好自身的德行。要想修养好自身德行的人，先要端正自己的心意。要想端正自己心意的人，先要使自己的心意真诚。要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要获取知识。获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。事物的原理推究明白后才能对外物的事理认识充分，对外物的事理认识充分后才能心意真诚，心意真诚后才能心思端正，心思端正后才能修养好德行，德行修养好后才能使家族中的各种关系整齐有序，使家族中的各种关系整齐有序后才能治理好国家，国家治理好后天下才能太平。从天子到普通百姓，一律要把修养德行作为根本。

致

送达、送到：致电、致意。

获得、招致、使到来（使动）：致知在格物。

集中（由招致引申）：专心致志。

意态、情趣：情致。

四、解读“三纲”“八目”

（一）三纲

1、何为“三纲”

提出了大学的“三纲”：明明德、亲民、止于至善。

《大学》对儒学作了一个高度概括，提出“明明德，在亲民，在止于至善”三项，即宋代儒家们所说的大学“三纲领”。

“明明德”是发扬自己固有的德性，是激发求学者完善自己的自觉性。

“亲民”，就是不仅自觉地进行自我修养，而且努力使自己的修养作用于民众，在儒家看来这是为治国平天下的伟业奠定精神基础。

“止于至善”就是要将自己的道德品质和社会、国家的治理提升到最完美的地步，不达到最理想的境界绝不停止，实际上是一个无限的完善过程。

2、“三纲”之间的关系

首句开宗明义，提出大学之道的“三纲”，第二、三句承接上文对如何达到大学之道，阐明其中的逻辑关系，为下文引出八条目做准备。

明明德完善自我，改进自我对己立德止于至善

亲民爱民顺民，引导百姓自我完善对人爱人

（二）八目

1、何为“八目”

第二段提出“八目”：格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身、齐家、治国、平天下。

2、“八目”之间的关系

“格物、致知”为第一步，对应的.是“知”；“诚意、正心、修身”为第二步，对应的是“修”；“齐家、治国、平天下”是第三步，对应的是“用”。“格物、致知、诚意、正心、修身”是修己，“齐有、治国、平天下”是安人。

格物、致知知内修修己独善其身修身立德

诚意、正心、修身修

齐家、治国、平天下用外治安人兼善天下致用亲民

（三）“三纲”“八目”之间的关系是怎样的？

“三纲”是宗旨，是纲领，是指导思想，“八目”是实现“三纲”的具体步骤。它们是一个不可分割的整体。

补充资料：

樊迟问仁。子曰：“爱人。”《颜渊》

孟子曰：“君子之于物也，爱之而弗仁；于民也，仁之而弗亲。亲亲而仁民，仁民而爱物。”

[解析]

孟子说：“君子对于万物，爱惜它，但谈不上仁爱；对于百姓，仁爱，但谈不上亲爱。亲爱亲人而仁爱百姓，仁爱百姓而爱惜万物。”

孟子说出了爱的层次。

对于物，主要是爱惜。爱惜的具体表现，就是要“取之有时，用之有节。”这种思想与今天保护环境，珍惜自然资源的意识一致。（物指禽兽草木）

对于民，也就是老百姓，需要仁爱。仁爱的具体表现，就是“老吾老以及人之老，幼吾幼以及人之幼”，是推己及人的仁爱。

对于亲，也就是自己的亲人，是一种以血缘关系为纽带的亲爱，是爱之中最自然的一个层次。

只有能够亲爱亲人，才有可能推己及人地去仁爱百姓；只有能够仁爱百姓时，才有可能爱惜万物。

爱虽然有亲疏，有差等，但这些亲疏差等之间却又有着内在的必然的联系。

从亲爱自己的亲人出发，推向仁爱百姓，再推向爱惜万物，这就形成了儒学的“爱的系列”，这个系列和《大学》“修身、齐家、治国、平天下”阶梯相统一的。

“让世界充满爱”，应该充满各种各样的爱。

五、请简要分析本文的论证特点

1、论证结构严谨，条理清晰。先提出表明宗旨的“三纲”，然后提出实现“三纲”的具体步骤，说明治国平天下和个人道德修养的一致性。浑然一体，结构严谨，条理清晰。

2、运用排比、顶真手法，论证力强。句式整齐，节奏分明，增强了语势，具有无可辩驳的力量。

六、小结

《大学之道》提出“三纲”“八目”，强调修身是根本，修身的目的是治国平天下，说明治国平天下和个人修养的一致性。

通过学习，我们可以得知，在长期占据中国封建统治思想主导地位的儒家文化中，修身、齐家、治国、平天下乃文人志士之所向往，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下联系密切。在古代中国人看来，个人、家族、民族、国家、天下并无具体刻意化分割，因而得以连接。

七、布置作业

思考：当今社会，我们如何借鉴学习“八目”的内容？

八、课后学情调研

（一）填空

《礼记》是儒家思想的资料汇编。《四书》指的是《大学》、《中庸》、《论语》、《孟子》。

（二）解释下列句子中加点词语的意思，有词类活用的要说明活用情况

1、在明（形作动，彰明）明（美好的）德

2、在止于至善（达到道德修养的最高境界）

3、知止而后有定（动作名，坚定的志向）

4、欲治其国者，先齐其家（形作使动，使整齐有序）

5、欲诚其意者，先致其知（获取）

6、致知在格（推究）物

7、家齐而后国治（治理得好）

8、壹是（一律）皆以修身为本一概

（三）翻译下列句子

1、大学之道，在明明德，在亲民，在止于至善。

译文：大学的宗旨，在于彰明美好的德行，在于亲近爱抚民众，在于达到道德修养的最高境界。

2、知止而后有定，定而后能静。

译文：知道要达到的“至善”境界，则志向坚定不移；志向坚定，方能心不妄动。

3、古之欲明明德于天下者，先治其国。

译文：古代那些想在天下彰明美好的德行的人，先要治理好自己的国家。

4、欲诚其意者，先致其知。致知在格物。

译文：要想使自己心意真诚的人，先要获取知识。获取知识的途径在于推究事物的原理。

5、自天子以至于庶人，壹是皆以修身为本。

译文：从天子到普通百姓，一律要把修养德行作为根本。

大学库课件【篇15】

主题：如何提高英语听力能力

英语是一门全球通用的语言，许多人学习英语的目的是为了迎合社会发展的趋势，或是为了国外留学、工作等目的。而英语听力能力是提高英语听说读写能力的重要基础，因此如何有效地提高英语听力能力成为了许多学习者所关注和探讨的话题。

首先，对于初学者而言，建议从日常生活中入手，比如在听英语歌曲、看英语电影、听英语广播等方面自己尝试去听，这有助于从交际上了解语言的使用环境，提高听力的识别能力。此外，在学习过程中多和外教或讲得不错的同学交流，不但能够加深自己的印象，还能练习自己的英语口语能力。

其次，建议学习者进一步提高自己的听力能力，在听教材内容时，可以通过一些小技巧来辅助学习，在深刻理解听力原文内容的基础上，不妨在听的过程中注意一些关键词或核心内容，将这些信息暂时记下，等到听完整个篇章后再进行整理和比对，有助于提高听力的准确度、流畅度。

第三，可以通过多种科技手段来提高听力能力，如近年来尤其流行的听力app或在线听力文章，通过练习、模拟各种听力情境，不断提升听力难度，从而起到系统、全面提高听力的效果。同时，也可以自己录制一些英文文章，用来练习自己的英文听力和口语能力。

总之，提高英语听力能力对于英语学习者来说非常重要，只要持之以恒地进行听力练习，掌握好听笔记的方法，这些都可以帮助学习者在日常使用英语时更加流利、自如地运用语言，从而有效地提高英语水平和英语语感。

五上语文课件精品

工作总结之家在阅读“五上语文课件”这篇文章时，发现里面有很多有益的提示和建议，建议大家把它收藏起来，并分享给朋友们。对于教师而言，编写教案和课件是必不可少的任务之一。因此，在编写过程中，不要草草了事，因为教案是课堂教学流程的规范化表现。

五上语文课件【篇1】

主题：青春记忆

青春是人生中最美好的时光，是最值得回忆的时光。它是一段跨越了十几年的时光，里面装满了欢笑与泪水，我们一路走来，经历了许多转折和成长，在这段时间里，我们收获了爱情、友情、亲情、梦想，它们成为了我们宝贵的青春记忆。

我记得在我初中时，我们班级的学生们都非常好动、好玩，我们经常一起上课偷偷说笑、嬉戏，还会一起跑到校园里打篮球、踢足球。我依然记得当时我们班的语文老师，就是那种外表非常严肃的老师，每次上课都很认真地讲解，似乎没有一刻松懈地过。直到有一次他临时有事不来上课，我们班上来了一个代课老师。但是，这位代课老师却跟其他语文老师不同，他十分随和、风趣。他用孟浩然的诗歌来引导我们学习，不同于以往那种枯燥的学习方法，我们反而对课堂更加感兴趣了，那节课简直像一场歇斯底里的嘻笑教育片，我们都玩儿疯了。

我还记得，在高中的时候真的特别努力地学习，因为我希望能够考上心目中理想的大学。我放弃了很多娱乐的时间和睡眠时间，利用每一个时间来复习各个学科，默默地为了那个理想而付出努力。让我难忘的是，高中的生活非常忙碌，但我从未觉得累心，因为我知道只要努力付出，理想就可以变成现实。最后，我如愿考上了大学，这也成为了我人生中非常值得纪念的一件事。

现在回想起来，青春的岁月是那么美好而值得怀念。那是一个充满憧憬和美好的时光，我们在这时也经历了很多挫折，但是我们仍然坚持不懈，不断前行，朝着自己的目标努力。这些回忆如今已经深深地刻在我们的心里，随时可以翻阅回忆。回首我们的青春，我们会发现过去那些美好的时光，渐渐地变成了青春记忆，成为了我们一生都会珍爱的宝藏。

五上语文课件【篇2】

主题：我的未来

大家好！我的名字是李丁。我是五年级学生。今天，我要和大家分享我的未来计划。

我小时候，我想成为一名医生，因为我想拯救更多的生命。但是，后来我发现，医学需要学习很长时间，难度非常大。因此，我决定改变我的方向，我想成为一名工程师。

我喜欢设计和开发新产品。我想利用我的想象力和好的创意来制造出世界上最好的机器和设备。在我的未来职业生涯中，我想为公司的成长做出贡献，走向成功。

我也想帮助那些需要帮助的人。比如说，我可以设计一些更便捷的产品，帮助老年人或体弱者进行一些简单的日常活动。此外，我也可以为社区建立更先进的设施，以帮助当地居民改善生活质量。

除此之外，我还想成为一位优秀的家长。我希望能够教育我的孩子如何正确认识自我，如何面对挫折和困难。我想要成为一个富有同情心和责任感的人。

为此，我将会努力学习。我会在我的学业上付出更多的时间和努力，提高我的专业技能和素质。同时，我也会注意提升我的人际交往能力，与人和善处事。

总之，我的未来计划就是成为一名工程师，设计更先进的产品，同时还能帮助需要帮助的人。我相信我的努力和坚持，最终会实现我的梦想。谢谢大家！

五上语文课件【篇3】

主题一：感恩

感恩是一种美好的情感，是我们在生活中应该时刻保持的态度。感恩让我们懂得珍惜眼前的幸福和快乐，也让我们反思过去的不足和痛苦。感恩是人与人之间最基本的关系，是一种互助和关爱的表现。

回忆起自己的成长过程，我感激所有曾经支持和帮助我的人，包括父母、老师、朋友、同学等等。他们教导我坚强、勇敢、坦诚、正直，成为了我今天的模样。我也深知，自己需要为他人创造价值和贡献力量，以回报这些人的帮助和付出。

感恩是一种责任和义务。我们应该通过行动来证明我们的感激之情，比如说给父母打电话表达我们的思念和关注，给老师寄一封感谢信表达我们的敬意和感受，给朋友送一个惊喜礼物表示我们的友谊和感情。用心去感恩，才能使我们更加幸福和快乐。

主题二：成长

成长是一个漫长而艰难的过程。在成长的路上，我们面临着各种各样的挑战，需要克服自己内心的恐惧和不安，在学习和生活中锻炼自己的能力和素质。

成长的道路上，我们要学会承担责任和面对困难，要尝试新的事物和经历新的感受，这样才能不断提升自己的能力和才华。在成长的过程中，我们也会遇到很多不同的人和事，他们教会了我们很多东西，也让我们更加成熟和坚强。

作为一个正在成长的人，我们应该不断让自己变得更好，不断挑战自己的极限，学会自我反省和总结，迎接未来的挑战和机遇。

主题三：勇气

勇气是鼓舞人心的力量，是日常生活中必不可少的品质。拥有勇气的人能够勇敢面对面前的困难，承担责任和压力，用自己的智慧和思想来解决种种问题。

在人生中，我们时刻都要肩负着各种责任和担忧，如何面对这些棘手的问题需要我们有勇气和胆略去面对，在这样的过程中我们也会学到很多东西。拥有勇气还可以让我们建立自己的信心和自信，这是克服困难和挑战的基础。

在生活、工作、学习中我们需要不断地充实自己，增长见识和知识，这样我们才能赢得灵活、果断的思维能力和态度，用更加聪明、更加有效的方法解决问题和解决难题。

主题四：责任

责任是成年人必须承担的义务和责任。一个拥有责任心的人能够清楚知道自己的位置和角色，能够认真对待工作和生活中的各种问题和挑战。在面对问题时，拥有责任心的人不会躲避，而是积极寻求解决办法，把事情做好。

在我们高中生的生活中，承担责任已经成为了我们生活的一部分，我们要不断地升华自己的责任感，做到有使命责任感，全身心地投入工作、学习和生活，做到做事有始有终，做好每一件事情。

考虑事情后果，考虑个人、家人和社会的未来，这样就能从小事切入，做到事无巨细、无论大小都仔细把事情做好，这就是我们作为拥有责任心的成年人所应该拥有的意识和态度。

主题五：希望

希望是一种坚持不懈的力量，是一种对未来美好的憧憬。每当生活遭遇挫折和逆境时，希望能给我们带来力量，让我们不断走向前方。

作为一个充满希望的人，我们要关注并追求自己的理想和目标，时刻保持对未来的信心和向前的动力。不仅要注重个人的发展，也要关心社会和环境，努力为建设和谐社会贡献自己的力量。

希望是一种力量，让我们拥有前行的动力和激情，让我们学会勇敢、坚强、有毅力，可以克服一切困难和挫折。无论多么艰难险阻，我们都要坚守自己的信仰与理念，用实际的行动去证明自己对未来的坚定信心。

五上语文课件【篇4】

我是一个五年级的小学生，最喜欢的学科就是语文。每天上语文课，感觉时间飞快，仿佛不够用，每节课都收获颇丰。今天，我想分享几篇与五上语文课程相关的主题范文。

主题一：祖国的大好河山

我国龙州，山川秀美，风景壮丽。这里有奇峰迭立、云雾缭绕的桂林山水；有湛蓝碧绿的钱塘江；有广袤无垠的大西北；有雪山草原的羌塘；还有长江黄河的壮丽景观。这些美景都是我们伟大祖国的宝藏，我们应该好好保护它们，珍惜它们。

主题二：感恩父母

父母是我们最亲密的人，无私奉献，关爱备至。每当我们遇到困难时，父母总会在身边陪伴着我们，帮助我们解决问题。他们默默付出，从不求回报，为我们的成长和未来默默奉献。因此，我们应该珍惜家人之间的感情，每天都要用言语和行动感恩父母和家人，让他们知道我们的心里是多么的感激和温暖。

主题三：勇敢加油

人生路上充满了坎坷和挫折，但只要我们勇敢前进，永不放弃，我们就会跨越所有的荆棘和坎坷，实现自己的梦想。有一次，我去学校的时候，突然下起了暴雨，我心中很害怕，但想到家人和老师的鼓励，我毅然决定走到学校，最终我成功地完成了任务。这件事使我明白，只要勇敢前行，我们就能克服一切困难。

以上三篇范文，都是紧密围绕五上语文教学内容，涵盖了课程所关注的主题，包含了爱国教育、家庭教育和人生哲理等方面。这些主题都非常重要，将帮助我们发掘自身潜力，并为未来做好准备。我相信，通过不断积累知识和经验，我们每个人都会变得更强大和成熟。

五上语文课件【篇5】

主题：学习方法

学习方法是学习过程中的关键因素。不同的学习方法会对学习效果产生影响。在学习中，我们应该选择适合自己的学习方法，提高学习效率。

首先，目标明确是成功学习的基础。我们应该对所学的知识范围有明确的了解。然后，我们可以将知识分成小块并进行分层次学习。掌握每个小块的知识后，我们才能更好地掌握整个知识体系。

另外，学习方法的多样性也非常重要。以视觉学习为例，最好的学习方法是清晰的图片、演示和图表。学习方法的使用将直接影响我们的记忆和理解能力。

合理安排学习时间也是非常必要的。学习时间不是越长越好，而是必须要合理支配。在学习时间中适当安排休息时间，也可以帮助大家更好地掌握学习内容。在同学们之间创造有益的竞争关系，可以在短时间内完成更多的学习任务。

最后，合理的学习方法还会促进学生培养自己的自学能力和认知能力。这是一种终身学习的享受和财富，能够帮助同学们掌握更多的知识。

总之，学习方法的选择决定了学习的效率和成功。掌握了正确的学习方法，就等于掌握了一个长久的学习方法。同学们应该注重实践，以期取得更大的进步。

导游词课件精品十一篇

无论你身在何处“导游词课件”都能够给你带来力量和鼓舞，相信我这些课程可以为您提供更好的学习体验。老师都需要为每堂课准备教案课件，每位老师都需要认真准备自己的教案课件。学生反应可以帮助教师做出更有效的课堂管理决策。

导游词课件

导游词课件篇1

2017年东莞市小学语文优秀教学（参评）论文（设计）

题

目: 《导游词》习作教学设计

工作单位：北京师范大学东莞石竹附属学校

作者姓名：刘志霞

联系电话： ***

日

期： 2017 年 4 月 5 日

邮政编码：523000

《导游词》习作教学设计

——写“世界遗产”的导游词

一、设计理念：

在这次习作当中，最大的设计理念是将习作贯穿到阅读理解当中，从阅读理解中学习写“导游词”的方法。引导学生把课文中的语言转化为自己的实用的语言，让学生学会如何写导游词，如何介绍一处景观，争做“小导游”。

二、教学目标：

1、了解“导游词”的含义，掌握“导游词”的写法。

2、在这次习作中，让学生学会写“导游词”，能主动地介绍自己喜欢的景观，争做“小导游”。

3、通过本次习作课，让学生树立起热爱祖国大好河山的美好情感。

三、教学重难点：

1、激发学生写作兴趣和热情，学会写“导游词”。

2、让学生树立起热爱祖国大好河山的美好情感。

四、教学过程：

（一）、复习旧知，谈话导入。

同学们，在第五单元的课文学习中，我们领略了万里长城的风采，游览了风景迷人的颐和园，还见识了被誉为“世界八大奇迹之一”的秦兵马俑。它们都是中华民族的瑰宝，是中华民族的艺术珍品。相信大家一定很想身临其境，那老师问你，有什么办法能免费游玩各处景点呢？

要想当上导游，是要经过考核的，这节课呢，就开始考核：写“世界遗产”的导游词。（板书）看谁能顺利考取导游证？ 1.学习“导游词”的定义。

导游词就是导游带领游客游览时的解说词。

2.尝尝“开心果”，品品“静心茶”。（活跃课堂气氛，再帮助同学们静下心来思考问题）

（二）、出示《苏州园林导游词》

苏州园林导游词

各位游客们，大家好！欢迎来到苏州园林参观。我是你们的导游，姓李，就叫我小李或李导好了。下面就让我们开始愉快的旅行吧！

苏州园林以山水秀丽，典雅而闻名天下，那里既有湖光山色，烟波浩淼的气势，又有江南水乡小桥流水的诗韵。

现在我们来到了拙政园。拙政园是我国四大古典名园之一。它位于苏州娄门内，是苏州最大的一处园林，也是苏州园林的代表作。你们看，拙政园建筑布局是不是疏落相宜、构思巧妙，风格清新秀雅、朴素自然？它的布局主题以水为中心，池水面积约占总面积的五分之一，各种亭台轩榭多临水而筑。主要建筑有远香堂、雪香云蔚亭、待霜亭、留听阁、十八曼陀罗花馆、三十六鸳鸯馆等。

接下来，让我们参观留园。留园为中国四大名园之一。始建于明代。留园占地约50亩，中部以山水为主，是全园的精华所在。主要建筑有涵碧山房、明瑟楼、远翠阁曲溪楼、清风池馆等处。留园内建筑的数量在苏州诸园中居冠，充分体现了古代造园家的高超技艺和卓越智慧。

我们游览了苏州园林的两个名园。下面大家可以在园内细细游赏，并且拍拍照，留作纪念吧。小心点，不要掉到水里或乱扔垃圾哦，一小时后我们在这里集合。谢谢大家对我工作的的支持！

（三）、思考问题：

1.开头部分和结尾部分的主要内容分别是什么？ 2.文章总述了苏州园林的面貌是怎样的？ 3.文章具体介绍了苏州园林的哪两处景点？ 4.文章导游的语言有什么特点？

5.文章可以分为几部分？（开头、总述、分述、结尾）

（四）、汇报并解决问题。

（五）、学习法宝，激发兴趣。

1.开头，是导游员在陪同游客参观、游览前，向大家表示问候、欢迎和自我介绍的话。

2.总述，是对旅游景点的一个总的介绍。

3.分述，是导游词的重点，要按游览顺序，对所选景观进行生动、具体的解说，使游客尽情饱览景点风光，领略世界文化遗产的艺术魅力，留下美好回忆。4.结尾，在讲解结束后，游客自由观赏前，应对游客提出温馨提示，并向游客表示感谢！

5.还要提醒大家注意，导游的语言要温柔、亲切、有礼貌（相机板书）

（六）、学生练习写作，师巡视。

学习完之后，请同学们要内化为自己的知识，掌握写导游词的技巧。现在，老师把这五个写作法宝送给你们，希望你们利用这些法宝，写一篇颐和园的导游词，希望你能顺利考取导游证，接下来考核开始：

第一组：写导游词开头语第二组：写导游词总述部分第三组：写导游词分述部分第四组：写导游词结束语

（七）、教师巡视，品读佳作。

请个别同学读出自己的作品，其他学生聆听并学习。

五、板书设计：

写“世界遗产”的导游词开头：欢迎问候自我介绍总述：概括介绍分述：具体介绍结尾：温馨提示道谢

六、作业布置：

把四组同学写的部分串联起来，就是一篇完整的导游词了，请同学们在下节课参看老师发给你的图片，选取颐和园的万寿山和昆明湖两个景点完成初稿。期待同学们的佳作！

导游词课件篇2

教学目标：

1、通过整理搜集的资料编写导游词，更深入的了解我国的世界遗产。

2、培养孩子提炼信息，整理资料的能力。

3、培养孩子习作的兴趣，在交流中提高口语交际的能力。

教学重点：

培养孩子整理资料的能力，深入了解我国的世界遗产，编写导游词。

教学过程：

一、激情导入：

1、孩子们，我国有许多的名山大川，地大物博，史悠久，到2003年的7月我国就有29处景观被列入《世界遗产名录》，在第五单元的学习中，老师请大家搜集它们的资料，你搜集的是什么？（孩子们交流）下面请欣赏老师搜集的图片吧。（看课件世界遗产的图片）

2、你想让我国的这些世界遗产发扬光大吗？这节课我们就来整理搜集的资料，编写导游词。（齐读课题）

3、请看习作要求。

二、明确要求：

1、请一名孩子读习作要求，其他孩子要边听边思考：本次习作到底有什么要求？

2、习作要求：写我国的世界遗产的导游词。

3、在平时的旅游中你听过导游词吗？那什么是导游词呢？（孩子自由回答）老师概括：导游词就是游客引导游客观光的解说词。下面我们就来欣赏一篇完整的'导游词。

三、赏析例文：

1、教师提出要求：认真默读例文，边默读边思考：这篇例文写了什么？按什么顺序写的？先写了什么？再写了什么？最后写了什么？体会作者是怎么写导游词的？可以一边写一边写批注。开始吧。

2、孩子们默读批注例文。

3、请同学把自己的学习收获先在小组内交流。

4、下面就来谈谈这篇导游词，谁愿意和大家共同分享。（学生根据提出的问题，交流学习体会，重点交流写导游词怎么写，写什么。）

5教师板书：总整体情况分主要内容：位置、历史、景点、总自然结尾

6、教师总结：写导游词就可以这样写，开头总写，介绍我国的世界遗产的整体情况，中间分述游览的主要内容，

可以写它们的位置呀，历史呀，景点呀，故事呀等等，注意要详略得当。最后要用总结性的语言自然的结尾，可以提醒游客保护历史文物或者保护化境，注意安全等。

四、整理资料：

1、面就请孩子们拿出自己搜集的资料，筛选整理你认为有价值的合适的内容，加上开头和结尾整理成一片通顺的导游词。开始吧。（学生整理资料）

2、下面就请大家把自己整理好的导游词先在小组内读一读，如果有不恰当的地方大家帮助修改。同时选取本组中最优秀的一篇。

五、口述作文：

1、下面就请每个小组的代表发言，说自己的导游词，其他孩子要做好记录，一会大家要各抒己见。

2、各个小组的代表读导游词，全班的孩子提出合理的建议。（交流7到8个）

3、教师小结：通过刚才的交流，老师发现大家提炼信息的能力都很强，如果你发现自己的内容有不合适的地方马上再整理再修改。

六、课堂总结：

通过本节课的学习，你有哪些收获？（孩子谈收获）那么下节作文课的时候我们就起草，成文，上大作文。

导游词课件篇3

一、设计思路：

教师根据所讲的课程内容提出问题，要求学生进行尝试练习，通过尝试练习，初步解决问题。教师根据学生在尝试练习过程中的难点和单元的重点，进行理论引导，有针对性地重点讲解，学生进行完善练习。充分发挥学生的主体作用和教师的主导作用。

二、基本步骤：

情境导入、提出问题、尝试练习、初步成果展示、理论指导、案例欣赏、完善练习、成果评价、提出问题。

三、教学目的：

通过学习掌握导游词的写作格式和要求，能够写作导游词。

四、教学目标：

（一）能力目标：

1．能够根据实际情况写作导游词。

2．能够运用文学描写的手段和方法进行写作，把自然和人类社会的美，如诗如画地展现给游客，给人亲临其境的感受，使人获得悦耳、悦心、悦意、悦神的审美效果。

3．能够做到语言大众化、口语化、通俗化、自然化、

生动化。

（二）知识目标：

1．了解：社交礼仪知识。

2．了解：地理、历史知识。

3．了解：地域文化风俗知识。

4．掌握：导游词的概念、特点、格式、写法。

（三）素质目标：

1．热爱祖国美好河山。

2．学会欣赏、赞美美丽风光。

五、教学重点：

导游词的格式与写法。

六、教学难点：

个性化写法；将资料中的语言，转化为导游词中的实用性语言。

七、教学准备：

参考资料：《故宫导游词》、《颐和园导游词》、《天坛导游词》

工具：多媒体

八、教学过程：

九：知识点总结

1．概念

导游词是导游人员引导游客观光游览时的讲解词，是导游员同游客交流思想，向游客传播文化知识的工具，也是应用写作研究的文体之一。

2．特点

口语化，知识性、文学性、礼节性。

3．正文

（1）前言

一般表示欢迎，交待活动计划、有关事项及联络方式，制造良好氛围或设置某种悬念，为整个旅游活动做铺垫。

开头语包括问候语、欢迎语、介绍语、游览注意事项和对游客的希望五个方面，放在导游词的最前面。

案例：

来自各地的朋友们：

大家好。今天由司机王师傅和我为大家提供服务，我们十分荣幸！大家在此旅游，可以把两颗心交给我们：一颗是“放心”，交给王师傅，因为他的车技娴熟；另一颗是“开心”，就交给李导我好了。旅游期间，请大家认清导游旗的标志，以免跟错队伍。请大家记清集中和游览时间，以免因一人迟到而影响大家的活动。大家有什么问题和要求请尽量提出来，我将尽力解决。最后祝大家这次旅游开心。谢谢！

（2）总述

是对游览的景观进行概括的介绍，介绍它的特色、价值、来源等。概括介绍旅游景点的位置、范围、地位、意义、历史、现状和发展前景等，目的是帮助旅游者对景点先有个总体了解，引起游览兴趣，犹如“未成曲调先有情”。

案例：

第二届农业嘉年华将于今年3月15日在昌平草莓博览园开幕，今年的主题主打农业“艺术范儿”，市民可在观赏奇瓜异果之余，体验采摘、农事等互动活动。

农业艺术展示活动包括瓜样年华、紫蔬探秘、幽兰奇境、五谷道场、奇妙乐园、蘑幻王国、蜂彩世界等项目,突出展示农业的创意性、艺术性以及生产、生活、生态、休闲的多功能性，既可以参观体验，又能够休闲互动。

（3）分述

对旅游线路上的重点景观从景点成因、历史传说、文化背景、审美功能等方面进行详细的讲解，使旅游者对旅游目的地有一个全面、正确的了解。这是导游词最重要的组成部分，也是最精彩的部分。在这部分中，要对各景点逐一加以详细地说明讲解，把景点最具魅力、最为传神的文化内涵挖掘出来，引导游客去欣赏、去品味。分述部分的内容一般以游踪为线索，以观赏的景物先后为顺序，一个景观为一个相对独立的.片断，片断与片断之间以常用口语承上启下，自然地进行过渡。目的在于给游客一个具体、形象、真切、深刻、美好的感受，激发游客的游兴。

案例：

在第二届北京农业嘉年华幽兰奇境馆是以兰花为“材”，千余枝白兰花垂吊在回旋长廊的顶棚上，开启了游客们的梦幻兰花之旅。如梦如幻的兰花隧道让人仿佛置身于花海之中。通过造型迥异的兰花景观以及兰花与生活的密切关系，让广大游客身临其境的感受到兰花的魅力。在品赏兰花之余，学习了解兰花的历史、种植、养护等知识。

（4）结尾

结尾包括感谢语、惜别语、征求意见语、致歉语和祝愿语五个方面，放在导游词的最后面。各位朋友：

我们的游览就要结束了，如果我的导游有使您不满意之处，请您指正。希望北京农业嘉年华之行给您留下了美好的回忆。最后我祝大家万事如意！谢谢！

九、课后体会

写导游词是同学们感兴趣的写作内容，为激发学生的写作兴趣，导课环节设置了这样的情境：班级承担北京农业嘉年华活动的导游讲解任务，要求导游员写作农业嘉年华导游词，这就极大地调动了学生的参与意识和写作兴趣。写作指导时提示学生注意导游词的结构和写作要求。提醒学生在导游词中穿插有关的小故事，学生对此很感兴趣，导游词中穿插了相关故事，使得导游词的内容更加生动，富有文化内涵，落实了教学目标中的素质目标。

导游词课件篇4

语文园地五——习作“世界遗产”导游词教学设计

课前准备：

1．学生搜集有关我国“世界遗产”的资料； 2．范文《秦兵马俑导游词》

教学目标：

1．学习导游词的格式和写法，会写导游词。2．培养搜集和处理信息的能力。

3．体会“世界遗产”的魅力，感受中国悠久历史和灿烂文化。

教学重点：导游词的格式及写法。

教学难点：将资料中的语言，转化为导游词中的实用性语言。

教学过程：

一．激趣导入，引入话题

过渡：截止2003年7月，我国已有29处景观被列入《世界遗产名录》，因此每年都有很多国内外的游客前来参观，这也使一些旅游公司急缺导游，大家想当小导游吗？

过渡：今天，开心旅游公司要在我们这里招聘小导游，导游招聘考试最重要的一关就是写一篇介绍景点的导游词，并进行现场导游服务，我们今天就先来个考前培训，培训合格的同学就可以充满信心地去开心旅游公司应聘了。

二．出示“培训内容”，讲解习作要求

过渡：首先进入我们的闯关模式，第一关：看看这次“培训”的要求。请同学们打开书本97页，看看告诉了我们一些什么。齐读习作要求、引导说

1、什么是导游词？

2、指名学生回答（导游词就是导游引导游客观光游览时候说的解说词。）

三、欣赏对比，了解导游词的特点

（一）范例引路，初步感受

过渡：接下来请进入第二关，有一位小导游也是根据这个提示写了一篇导游词。大家看看，就是同学们手中的《秦兵马俑导游词》。生齐读

（二）对比感悟，了解特点

过渡：再接着进入我们的第三关，请小组合作讨论：导游词和以前写的作文有什么不同的地方？先介绍什么？再介绍什么？最后介绍什么？

1、了解导游词热情的前言：首先我们看到第一段先写什么？（板书：自我介绍）

过渡：导游词的开场白，我们叫做“前言”，如果你是一位导游，当你向游客问候并介绍自己的时候，要带上什么样的语气呢？指名说

过渡：作为一名导游，精彩的开场白能够吸引游客，这是很重要的基本功，如果是让你自己来介绍自己，你会怎么介绍你自己呢？请跟同桌说说。哪位小导游来来介绍介绍自己？（指名说）

2、再写什么？有相关的知识介绍景点？

过渡：自我介绍完后，我们就应该来介绍景点了，该怎么介绍呢？师引导：介绍景点由什么出名？而且有哪些非常有特色的景点！这就是景点总体的情况（板书：总体情况），再接着重点介绍景点的风光、故事、传说、这就是分述（板书：风光、故事、传说），3、正文写完了，最后写什么？

过渡：最后提醒游客注意安全和做一个文明的游客。（板书：提示、感谢和祝福语）（游览结束时，要对游览内容做个小结，并向游客表示感谢和祝福，这样的导游词跟吸引游客。）

过渡：同学们学得真好，一下子就掌握了写导游词的方法了，哪位同学学得最好最快呢？下面进入我们的第四关。四．动笔成文，模拟导游

过渡：请你试着以导游的身份，拿起笔，写下你独具魅力的导游词吗？开始写作！

1、学生写作，老师巡视。进行个别指导

过渡：最后一关进入我们的小导游现场面试时间，谁来试试？非常不错，培训合格的同学你可以充满信心地去开心旅游公司应聘了。

导游词课件篇5

教学目标：

熟悉景区的历史和文化背景；

熟悉景区的地理位置和周边环境；

能够流畅、准确地介绍景区；

提高导游技能和服务质量。

教学内容：

本次教学将围绕某一景区进行介绍和导游。主要内容包括景区的历史文化、地理位置、景点介绍等。

教学过程：

一、介绍景区的历史和文化背景

1、导游可以通过简单的背景介绍来吸引游客的兴趣。

2、引导游客了解景区的历史背景，让游客对景区有一个全面的了解。

二、介绍景区的地理位置和周边环境

1、导游可以介绍景区的地理位置和周边环境，包括周围的.交通、气候等。

2、让游客了解景区所处的地理环境，有利于游客更好地理解景区的特色和魅力。

三、景点介绍

1、导游可以介绍景区的主要景点，包括景点的历史文化、地理位置、特色等。

2、引导游客参观景点，了解景点的历史和文化背景，感受景点的独特魅力。

四、导游技能和服务质量

1、导游可以通过良好的服务态度、语言表达能力和导游技巧来提高导游质量。

2、引导游客在参观景区时保持良好的秩序，避免影响其他游客的参观体验。

五、总结

1、导游可以总结本次导游的经验和教训，提高自己的导游技能和服务质量。

2、鼓励游客提出意见和建议，帮助导游不断完善服务。

教学方法：

本次教学采用讲授、演示、实践相结合的方法，以达到教学目标。

教学评估：

1、教师可以通过提问、观察、反馈等方式来评估学生的学习情况和导游技能。

2、鼓励学生自评和互评，帮助学生提高导游质量和服务态度。

教学反思：

本次教学效果较好，学生对导游的历史文化、地理位置和景点介绍等方面有了一定的了解。同时，通过学生的互评和自评。

导游词课件篇6

目标定位

在写作中运用自己积累的语言材料，通过学习写导游词，把平时积累的语言转化为自己的语言，培养语言表达能力和交际能力。

要点阐释

通过写导游词这种语言实践形式促使学生运用课文语言。

在具体的导游情景中，学生有个性有创意地去激活自己的语言积累，提高表达能力。

练习内容

介绍“世界遗产”的导游词

课前活动

1、背诵本单元介绍著名风景名胜的精彩片断。

2、查阅有关“世界遗产”的文字资料，搜集相关的美丽图片。

3、学习最基本的导游常识和导游语。

教学设计

教学目标

1、通过创设具体生动的导游情景引导学生积累语言、运用语言、学习语言，提高语言表达能力和口语交际水平。

2、体会“世界遗产”的魅力，感受中国的悠久历史和灿烂文化。

教学重点

创设具体的导游情境，学生在具体的情境中能够运用语言材料自由表达，自主写作，用丰富的形式学习导游。

教学难点

引导学生在具体的情境中运用语言材料自由表达。

授课类型

写作指导

课时安排

三课时

教学过程:

一、设置情境，趣味导入

同学们，某某旅游公司要在我们这里招聘小导游，导游招聘考试最重要的一关就是写一段著名的导游词，并进行现场导游服务。

好!我们今天就来个考前培训，培训合格的同学发给导游证，有了导游证，哈哈，你就可以充满信心地去旅游公司应聘了。

二、互相交流，学习技巧

师:同学们，大家外出旅游的时候，一定见识过不少优秀的专业导游，你早已从他们身上学到不少导游技巧了?快快贡献出来，大家一起分享吧。

(学生回忆生旅游经历，互相介绍优秀导游的导游方式和技巧。

由此，教师领着学生小结整理有关导游技巧,学习导游知识。)

1、语言通俗，亲切自然

师:请同学们读一读下列导游语，感受一下导游语的语言特色。

女士们、先生们，小朋友们:你们好!欢迎大家光临颐和园。

我是风光旅行社的导游，姓杨，大家叫我小杨就行了。

颐和园是北京首都最为著名的皇家园林，我非常高兴能有机会陪同各位欣赏它精致的园林艺术和美丽的建筑艺术，共度这段美好的时光。”

2、按照顺序，讲解清楚简洁的总述

导游语可以分为:热情的前言、简洁的总述、生动分述、亲切告别等几部分。

(1)热情的前言:

(导游员在陪同游客参观、游览前，向大家表示问候、欢迎和自我介绍的话，如上文那几句，既简短、亲切，又热情得体。)

(2)简洁的总述:(是对游览景点的一个总的介绍。)

师:读一读下列导游词，体会总述的语言特点。

“这里就是世界闻名的故宫博物院，一般大家都称它故宫。

顾名思义，故宫就是昔日的皇家宫殿。

从明朝的永乐皇帝到清朝末代皇帝爱新觉罗溥仪，共有24位皇帝在这座金碧辉煌的宫城里统治中国长达500多年。

帝王之家，当然气势宏大，目前，这里是世界上规模最大，保存最完整的古代皇家宫殿群，已被联合国教科文组织评定为世界文化遗产。”

(3) 生动的分述:

要按游览顺序，对所选景观逐一进行生动、具体的解说，使游客尽情饱览景点风光，领略世界文化遗产的艺术魅力与风韵，留下美好回忆。

这部分是导游词的重点。

(4)亲切告别

在游览结束后，应对游览的内容做一小结，并向游客表示感谢和告别。

师:请同学们阅读以下结束语，了解结束语的风格特点

各位游客，我们今天的游览就要结束了。

非常高兴能与大家度过这段美好的时光。

对我今天的导游有什么不满意之处，请您指正，祝大家玩儿得愉快，万事如意。

谢谢!”

3、语言生动，栩栩如生

4、穿插故事，引人入胜

(1)导游给我们介绍风景名胜，有时为了让游客感受旅游景点的文化内涵、以及神秘色彩，往往会在导游词里穿插什么内容?

(风景背后的神话、传说，鲜为人知的神秘故事)

(2)你曾听到过导游给你讲解的什么故事呢?请大家说一说吧!(引导学生畅所欲言)

生1、我游览长城时导游介绍的孟姜女哭长城的故事。

生2、我游览泰山时导游给自己讲解的过去的封建皇帝在泰山封禅的故事。

生3、我游览洛阳龙门石窟时，导游给我讲解的洛阳龙门石窟来历的传说。

生4、我游览张家界时，导游给自己讲的张家界名称的来历。

5、友好提醒，文明游览

师:作为导游，应该如何让大家玩得愉快，游览文明呢?

要及时提醒大家游览中需要注意的各种事项，并向游客提出争当文明游客的要求。

如:要爱护文物古迹，不要乱丢垃圾，不再文化古迹上刻字等等。

三、分享资料，写导游词

1、分享资料:

小组内互相交流查阅的资料，实现资源共享。

2、写导游词

同学们，拿起笔，写下你独具魅力的导游词，向人们展示祖国优秀的世界自然、文化遗产吧。

相信这些自然文化景观定会因为你的解说，更加绽放异彩，妙趣横生。

四、学做导游，互相评议

1、设置情景，

风光旅行社在此招聘导游，感兴趣的请到这里参与面试吧!

2、模拟导游

教师提醒学生，语气要口语化，不要让别人听着像背诵，要亲切自然地给别人讲述。

3、互相评议

请一部分同学做评委，给参与面试的同学打分，并作评议。

评议时参考学到的相关技巧，既要评议其讲述的内容，也要评议其口语的技巧。

导游词课件篇7

教材分析

《学写导游词》是小学三年级语文下册第六单元安排的习作内容。本组教材的主题是“我国的世界遗产”，学写介绍我国“世界遗产”的导游词对于三年级学生来讲难度较大。这就要我们在习作前需要做大量的“储备”工作。课前应布置学生多方查找，搜集有关“世界遗产”的资料。习作要求先确定自己要介绍哪一处“世界遗产”，然后选取最有特色的内容向大家介绍。可以讲景点风光，也可以讲与景点有关的故事、传说，还要提示参观游览的注意事项。在提高学生习作能力的同时，尽可能多地培养学生了解我国的“世界遗产”的兴趣，激发学生的民族自豪感和热爱祖国之情，培养自觉保护文物古迹和风景名胜的意识与习惯。

学情分析

三年级的小学生对导游、导游词的了解极少，对自己查找的资料不能正确进行改编，有的在格式上也不太懂。课堂上需要老师的更多的引导、启发。教师课前应和学生一起搜集资料，课堂上出示 “导游词”的范文，让学生感悟导游词的写法；创设当“小导游”的情境，激发学生的习作兴趣。教师要教会学生怎么用资料，实现资料和自己语言的转变。在教学时，要把说和写充分结合起来，给学生创设表达的机会。

教学目标

1、掌握导游词的格式和写法。

2、培养学生口语表达能力，搜集和处理信息的能力。

3、加深学生对我国的世界遗产的了解，树立保护世界遗产的观念。

教学重点是学会导游词的写法，难点是把握导游词的语言特点，将资料中的语言转化为导游词中的实用性语言。

设计理念

没有方法引导的作文课、偏离学生生活的作文课都是不成功的。创设真实的生活情境，会让学生在不知不觉中突破习作的难点，激发习作兴趣。习作教学要做到“两充分”“一渗透”：

一要给学生充分思考的时间，进行作前构思；

二要给学生充分交流的时间，在交流中进行思维碰撞，开启习作思路。

教师评价中要渗透习作要求。一堂成功的课，应该不是老师提出习作要求，而是通过对话、评价、指导，将习作要求有机地渗透到教学中去，这应该是作文教学极力追求的“春风化雨”式的教学境界。

教学过程

一、模拟情境，初步感受“导游词”的特点。

谈话导入：亲爱的游客们：大家好！欢迎大家来到莱州中心小学，请跟随我一起参观一下我们美丽的校园。今天这节课就让我们一起来学习导游词的写法，下课之后请同学们当一回导游，介绍一下我们美丽的校园风光。

[课始，教师几句简单的话语，既很好地组织了教学，营造了良好的课堂氛围，同时又让学生初步感受了导游词这一新的内容，收效不错。]

同学们，如果给你一个机会让你去当一回导游，过把导游瘾，想想你得做什么准备？

生1；要了解这个景区的景点风光的特点。

生2：要搜集与这处景点有关的大量资料。

生3：要准备一份好的导游词。

师：同学们谈得不错，导游词就是导游员引导游客游览时的讲解词。今天我们就来学习导游词的写法。

二、学习本单元习作的`要求：

1、请大家打开课本104页，找同学读一读本单元的习作要求，其他同学认真听，看看本次习作向我们提出了怎样的要求？

2、生自由读习作要求，读完之后用笔画出重要信息。

3、全班交流，教师适当板书。（板书：我国的一处世界遗产）

[设计意图：习作前明确写作要求很重要，是对学生良好审题习惯的培养。教师对每一条要求进行适当的解释，有利于学生进一步理解写作要求，了解撰写导游词的基本方法。]

三、范文引路，学习写法。

师：学习了《颐和园》一文，园中的昆明湖给老师留下了深刻的印象，为了让更多的人了解颐和园中昆明湖的美景，老师又专门上了“导游网”查了些资料，试着写了一篇导游词，就是同学们手中的《颐和园导游词》。现在请同学们自由轻声地读一读习作，想一想：导游词该怎么写？（先写什么，再写什么，最后写什么）

1、学生自由读文，读后试着同位间交流。

2、在此基础上进行全班交流，教师适时点拨。

生1：写导游词一般在开头部分要先和游客打一下招呼，对大家的到来表示欢迎，作一下自我介绍。

师：是啊，这即是导游词的第一部分：（板书：见面时的开头语）。这一部分内容简短亲切又引出下文。例如范文中的第一自然段，还有老师开始上课时说的那一段，其时就是导游词的开头语。要用第一人称的写法，注意运用礼貌用语。大家用导游的语气齐读一下第一自然段。

生2：中间部分要写一写这处景点的美丽风光。

生3：对，这应该是导游词的主要部分。习作中先对颐和园的作了一个总体的介绍，然后具体介绍了昆明湖的美丽景色。

生4：老师，我还发现您在介绍昆明湖的美丽景色的同时还引入了一段资料：十七孔桥的由来。

师：同学们可真厉害，说得都不错，你们刚才谈得也就是导游词的第二部分：景点风光的介绍（板书）。这一部分是导游词的正文，我们可以介绍景点风光，可以讲与景点有关的故事、传说等。在写这一部分内容时，我们应该注意哪些问题呢？

生：要选最有特色的内容写，还要按一定的顺序。像《颐和园》一文，作者就是按参观游览的顺序分别介绍了长廊、万寿山和昆明湖的美丽景色。（师相机板书：选特色、按顺序、融感受）

师：值得注意的是，景点风光的美是可以用眼睛看到的，而景点名称的由来、景点背后的故事、传说却鲜为人知，这些内容可以为这些景点增加神秘感。像孟姜女哭长城的传说，关于犀牛海的传说……这样的导游词会更吸引游客。

正文写完了，最后要写什么呢？

生：要和游客告别，要对游客表示祝愿。

师：这也是导游词的最后一部分：（板书：离别时的告别语）在游览结束时，要对游览的内容作一小结，并向游客表示感谢和祝愿，像例文中的最后一个自然段。请大家齐读一下最后一段。

（以上教师的讲解结合范文，少而精）

师：这只是导游词的一般格式，根据需要，可以进行适当调整。导游词的题目一般都是景点的名称，这样可以一目了然，你像，写泰山，题目可以是《泰山导游词》。

[导游词是应用文的一种，是学生首次接触，给出一篇符合本次习作要求，格式较为标准的范文是很有必要的。学生可以从阅读中直接感悟写法，并将写法灵活运用到自己的习作中去。在这一过程中，主要让学生借助例文，自己发现方法，教师只作精当点拨，引导学生明确导游词的写法。]

四、构思交流，口头指导。

本单元我们学习了四篇介绍我国的“世界遗产”的文章《长城》、《颐和园》、《九寨沟》、《秦兵马俑》，课前，老师也让大家搜集了一些关于我国的“世界遗产”的资料，本次习作，你可以写课文中的内容，可以选择资料中自己喜欢的一处，也可以写自己曾经去过的一处。

1、请大家静下心来想一想，你打算介绍哪一处，你打算怎么写？

[此环节要给学生较充裕的时间进行选材构思，为动笔快速成文作好铺垫。]

2、全班交流。

生1：我想写峨嵋山——乐山大佛。我想先写一写对游客的问候、欢迎，作一下自我介绍，提示一下注意事项，然后具体介绍乐山大佛，结尾部分表达一下对游客的祝愿。

师：你能试着以导游员的身份说一下见面时的开关头语吗？

生1：可以。“各位游客，大家好！欢迎大家来到峨嵋山观光旅游，我是导游员小张，游览过程中，希望游客注意安全。”

师：将来你肯定会是一名出色的导游员。谁还能试着说一说见面时的开头语？指生交流，加以指导。继续交流。

生2：我想介绍九寨沟。开头想写……中间想写……结尾想写……

师：能具体说一说你正文部分打算怎么写吗？

生2：我想先介绍一下九寨沟的自然风光，然后引入关于犀牛海的传说。

师：你能试着说一说吗？

[当学生口头交流很笼统时，如果教师只是为走过场，不加引导，这一环节将失去意义。因此教师要引导学生说具体，起到给其他学生示范的作用。如果学生水平较高，习作前的准备很充分，课堂上可直接让学生口头作文，进行有针对性地指导。]

生3：我想介绍泰山风景区。

师：结尾部分你打算怎么写呢？

生3：“游客朋友们，接下来请大家自由游赏泰山风景，祝您旅途愉快！再见！”

[设计意图：在动笔成文之前，给学生一定的时间构思之后，将导游词的三部分内容分解开来，进行口头交流，一来可以使学生相互学习，有所借鉴，第二通过集体汇报和教师在此过程中的即兴评改，可使学生进一步感悟导游词的写作方法。这样做，有利于本次习作重难点的突破。]

友情提示：有句俗话说，祖国风光美不美，全凭导游一张嘴。导游词的语言要口语化，我们要将课文或资料中的书面语改成口头语，感觉就像与游客面对面。例如，课本102页关于兵马俑的神态的描写这一段，老师将它进行发这样的改写：

“大家看，这就是举世闻名的秦兵马俑。瞧这位，颔首低眉，若有所思，好像在考虑如何战胜敌人；再看这一位，目光炯炯，神态庄重，分明在暗下决心，誓为统一天下而战；再看他，紧握双拳，待命出征……啊，快来看看这位战士，双眼凝视远方，像不像在思念家乡的亲人？走近一点，来，小朋友，有没有听到他轻微的呼吸声？”

五、动笔快速成文，教师巡视指导。

师：同学们，拿起笔，写下你独具魅力的导游词，向人们展示祖国优秀的“世界自然、文化遗产”吧。

学生写作，教师巡视，进行个别的、有针对性的指导。

导游词课件篇8

习作要求:

长城、颐和园、秦兵马俑……给我们留下深刻的印象。

为了让更多的人了解我国的“世界遗产”，我们来写写介绍“世界遗产”的导游词。

先确定自己要介绍的景点。

可以讲景点风光，也可以讲与景点有关的故事、传说，还要提示参观游览的注意事项。

写好以后，可以根据所写的导游词，模拟导游进行讲解。

课前准备:

1.学生搜集有关我国“世界遗产”的资料;

2.教师撰写范文《天坛导游词》，制作录像短片。

教学目标:

1.学习导游词的格式和写法，会写导游词。

2.培养搜集和处理信息的能力。

3.体会“世界遗产”的魅力，感受中国悠久历史和灿烂文化。

教学重点:导游词的格式及写法。

教学难点:将资料中的语言，转化为导游词中的实用性语言。

教学过程:

一、创设情境，了解“导游词”，理解习作要求。

1.播放一段录像--北京天坛公园导游员迎接游客时的情景。

导游:“各位广东来的朋友，你们好!欢迎大家来到首都北京，我姓张，大家叫我小张就可以了。

非常高兴今天能够陪同各位一起游览从前皇帝祭天的地方--天坛。

现在就让我们沿着当年皇帝登坛的路线开始游览，请大家跟我走。”

2.谈话:录像短片中的小张是干什么的?

师:随着旅游事业的发展，导游员越来越多，已经成为一个非常重要的职业。

导游员引导游客游览时的讲解词，称为“导游词”。

(板书:导游词)刚刚同学们听到的那几句话，就是导游词的开场白，也称“前言”。

(板书:前言)

今天，我们就来学习“导游词”的写法。

(板书:学写)

谁来读一读这次习作的要求?

设计意图:尽管家庭旅游越来越时尚，但很多学生对“导游员”“导游词”还是没有更多具体的认识。

录像短片的播放，能够创设情境，帮助学生了解或回忆曾经听过、见过的情景，对“导游词”产生直观感知。

3.演示文稿:《语文园地五》习作要求。

指名读，认真听，说一说本次习作有哪些要求。

4.教师讲解习作要求:

(1)确定自己要介绍的“世界遗产”。

师:我国被联合国教科文组织评为“世界遗产”的景观共有29处，在第五单元的学习中，同学们已经有所了解。

可以从中选择一处，作为自己介绍的对象。

(2)选取最有特色的内容向大家介绍。

师:一个景点，可以介绍的东西很多，要选取最有特色的内容。

(3)提示参观游览的注意事项。

师:可以适时提醒游览时的注意事项，或提出“当文明游客”的要求。

设计意图:习作前明确写作要求很重要，是对学生良好审题习惯的培养。

教师对每一条要求进行适当的解释，有利于学生进一步理解写作要求，了解撰写导游词的基本方法。

二、范文引路，学习写法。

1.出示范文《天坛导游词》(附后)

师:导游词的题目，一般都是景点的名称，这样可以使人一目了然。

按照本次习作的要求，同学们可以选取景点中最有特色的内容写，不一定面面俱到，因此题目也可以是:“×××导游词”“××风光简介”“××的传说”等。

2.学生自行阅读，思考:

(1)导游词有哪些内容?

(2)导游词在语言上、写作顺序上有什么特点?

3.交流讨论，教师指导写作方法:

(1)导游词的具体内容，一般有前言、总述、分述、结尾四个部分。

前言，是导游员在陪同游客参观、游览前，向大家表示问候、欢迎和自我介绍的话，如录像中小张讲的那几句，既简短、亲切，又有引出下文的作用。

(例文中的第1自然段)

总述，是对游览景点的一个总的介绍。

(例文第2、3自然段)

分述部分是导游词的重点，要按游览顺序，对所选景观逐一进行生动、具体的解说，使游客尽情饱览景点风光，领略世界文化遗产的艺术魅力与风韵，留下美好回忆。

(例文4-14自然段)

结尾，在游览结束后，应对游览的内容作一小结，并向游客表示感谢和告别。

(例文的最后一段)

(适时板书:前言、总述、分述、结尾)

(2)导游词的特点:内容真实，语言生动，按游览顺序叙述，适时对游客提出注意事项。

为了使导游词更加真实、生动、有条理，同学们应收集有关这个景点的资料。

因为是向游客作介绍，所以引用的数据、资料必须真实，不能道听途说、添枝加叶。

当然，涉及到的一些故事、传说、笑话，可以另当别论。

(板书:内容真实、语言生动、言之有序、适时提示)

设计意图:导游词是应用文的一种，是学生首次接触，给出一篇符合本次习作要求，格式较为标准的范文是很有必要的。

学生可以从阅读中直接感悟写法，并将写法灵活运用到自己的习作中去。

三、运用写法，口头编写《颐和园导游词》。

师:本单元我们学习了3篇描写名胜古迹的文章，其中大家最熟悉的是北京的颐和园，根据课文内容和课前收集的资料，请同学们想一想，如果我们编写一篇《颐和园导游词》，该怎样写?

学生小组讨论，研究有关颐和园的资料。

集体汇报、讨论。

教师分别请每个小组出一名代表，就“前言”“总述”“分述”“结尾”部分进行口头作文。

教师评点，适时组织全班学生讨论该怎样写。

设计意图:口头编写同一篇导游词，可以体现较强的训练功能。

第一可使学生在小组交流中相互学习，相互促进;第二通过集体汇报和教师的即兴评改，可使学生进一步感悟导游词的写作方法;第三，通过同一内容的不同汇报，可使学生找出自己的差距，从同伴那里学习多角度表达。

另外，“颐和园”是本单元的精读课文，学生对其语言已较为熟悉，选它作为训练内容，有利于本次习作难点的突破。

四、教师小结口头编写中的问题，布置本次习作。

师:导游词是游览时的讲解词，是为口头表达而写的，因此语言要生动、形象、富有感染力。

另外，风景是可以直接看到的，而景点名称的由来，风景背后的.神话、传说、故事等等，却鲜为人知。

因此，在导游词中加入这些内容，也能增加旅游的神秘感。

你打算介绍哪一处世界遗产，介绍其中的哪些有特色的内容呢?

指名学生说一说，教师适时给予选材方面的指导。

师:同学们，拿起笔，写下你独具魅力的导游词，并用你生动的讲解，向人们展示祖国优秀的“世界自然、文化遗产”吧。

相信这些自然文化景观定会因为你的解说，更加绽放异彩，妙趣横生。

设计意图:教师的小结针对学生口头练习中的问题进行，是对习作的进一步指导，能够强化学生的认识。

由于每个学生习作内容不同，因此教师的指导除了共性之外，还要有一些个性。

个性化的指导可以体现在对习作主体--“有特色内容”的选择上，不需要花费很多的时间，教师便可当堂进行点拨，帮助学生选好习作材料。

特别建议:

本次习作是为“世界遗产”撰写导游词，学生如亲临所写地点旅游过，会有很多直观的印象，无论听还是写，都会更真切，也更亲切。

天坛公园位于北京崇文区，学生对天坛公园中的有特色的景物耳熟能详，因此范文使用了《天坛导游词》，对学生感悟写作方法起到了很好的示范作用。

教师在参考使用本教案时可以将例文换成学生熟悉的其他内容，这样可以不必在理解内容方面花去过多的时间。

本次习作重在引导学生把本单元课文中的语言和所收集的资料中的语言，转化为学生自己的实用性语言。

因此在课前要布置学生收集相关“世界遗产”的详细资料，以备改写导游词时参考使用。

在讲评课中，要让学生模拟导游进行讲解。

这样，既可通过实践进一步发现自己习作中的不当之处，还可锻炼学生的表达能力。

附:例文《天坛导游词》

天坛导游词

各位游客，你们好!今天我们要参观的是以前皇帝祭天的地方--天坛。

天坛是明朝永乐皇帝建成的祭天圣坛，主建筑是大祀殿，也就是今天的祈年殿。

天坛有外坛墙和内坛墙，北圆南方，寓意天圆地方。

乾隆年间，将大祀殿改为现在的祈年殿，将屋顶瓦片改成蓝色的琉璃瓦，形成了今天我们看到的这个世界上最大的祭天建筑群。

这一祭天圣地，在1860年遭到了英法联军的洗劫，1900年又遭到八国联军的蹂躏。

新中国成立以后，这里成了著名的旅游景点，来这里的除了旅游者，还有很多健身的人们。

现在就让我们沿着当年皇帝登坛的路线开始游览。

现在我们是沿着天坛建筑的中轴线在向南行进，将要看到的就是古代皇帝祭天的圜丘坛。

圜丘有两道围护墙，外方内圆，符合天圆地方的说法。

每道墙都有四组门，大家可以注意到，门的大小都不一样，这是因为中门是上帝专用的，所以高大;皇帝只能从左侧的门进入;而其他的官员只能从右边最小的门通过。

来到圜丘坛下，我们马上要开始登坛了，不过要请您留心数一数，每层坛面都有多少台阶。

到了最高层，大家会发现，坛上所有的台阶数，都是九或者九的倍数。

这些难道都是巧合么?当然不是，因为古人认为九是极阳数，所以工匠们便用这个数字来赋予圜丘坛“崇高”之意。

说完了神坛的奇妙，我再给您介绍一下祭天大典的盛况。

到了每年的冬至，皇帝就要在这里祭天。

在这个典礼上，需要特别提到的是皇帝恭读祝文所站立的地方，就是这块天心石。

它是天坛三大声学现象之一。

在这里朗读的时候声音特别洪亮，各位游客不妨体验一下，也像当年的皇帝一样，向上天诉说自己美好的愿望。

现在咱们继续沿着中轴线行走，面前的建筑叫做天库，它的正殿就是皇穹宇。

皇穹宇三个字也分别代表了“至高无上”“天”“宇宙”的意思，更加显示出它的神圣和至尊。

这组建筑不仅十分精美，而且还有回音壁和三音石，这和刚才我们说的“天心石”合称天坛三大声学现象。

回音壁就是皇穹宇的外墙，围墙十分平滑，可以传声，在传递途中对声音损失极小，只要对着墙说话，就算相隔四五十米，见不到面，都可以清晰地听到对方说话。

三音石是皇穹宇大殿正前方的三块石头，您站在第一块石头上拍手可以听到一次回音，站在第二块石头上拍手可以听到两次，而站在第三块石头上拍手就可以听到三次回音，所以称为三音石。

在游览过了圜丘坛和皇穹宇之后，我们即将走进祈谷坛了，祈谷坛的主体建筑就是祈年殿，祈年殿是一座极具中国特色的独特建筑。

圆形尖屋顶是用蓝色的琉璃瓦覆盖，以此来象征天。

和每年的祭天一样，这里是用来祈谷的地方。

在祭祀的当天，有乐队在殿外月台上奏乐，身穿祭服的皇帝虔诚步入神殿，向牌位行大礼，祈祷上苍，然后把供品送到祈年门外焚烧，送上天宫。

现在我们从祈谷坛的东门出来，可以看到一条长廊，是祭祀时运送祭品的通道。

今天的观光游览就要结束了，在天坛的这段时光希望能成为您北京之游中的永恒记忆。

同时也请您把天坛的祝福带给您的家人朋友。

导游词课件篇9

各位团友：

从现在开始，车上的各位就是我们的朋友了，你们在四川遇到什么样的困难，或者有什么样的麻烦，可以告诉我们，我们回尽全力帮助大家解决的，同时也希望各位多多配合我们的工作。

今天是200X年X月X日，这是一个值得大家记住的日子，因为从这个时候开始，各位就踏上了四川之旅的行程。

四川简称蜀，三国时，属国被司马昭灭掉以后，后主刘婵被安置在了魏国的首都洛阳，过着豪华而奢侈的生活，有一天，司马昭问刘婵，还想不想蜀国。

刘婵回答到：“此乐间，不思蜀也”。

乐不思蜀这句典故后来泛指在新的环境中得到了乐趣，而不想回到就的环境中去了。

各位来至XX省，XX省简称X，在四川这X天的时间里，我希望各位能发出“乐不思X”的感叹，当然这并不是贬义，只是希望各位能在四川玩的愉快，乘兴而来，满意而归嘛。

有句古话说到了“有鹏自远方来，不亦乐呼”，我正是怀着这样的心情向大家介绍我们即将开始的行程……

我们的车再走10多分钟就要到市区了。

下面我问大家一个问题，又没有人知道中国的“四大城市”呢?这“四大城市”就是北京、上海、广州和我们现在到达的成都。

和北京、上海、广州一样，成都的发展也一样凝聚了历史沉淀的势能和当前西部大开发的动力，其经济总量站了全川的30%以上，人均年收入已经达到了XX万元人民币。

众所周知，成都是四川的省会，总面积在10000平方公里以上，人口已经达到了1000多万人，从这个数字上大家可以看出，成都面积不大，但是人口密度是相当高的。

在中国乃至全世界，属成都人过的最另类，在北京，时间就是机遇;在上海，时间就是时尚;在广州，时间就是金钱;然而到了成都，时间就是生活。

在全国各大城市中，成都人活的最潇洒，最没有压力感。

有人曾经作过这样一个统计，在街上，属成都人步行最慢;早上，属成都人起床最晚;而在成都，茶馆的营业时间又是最长……那么对在座的各位来说，这个中国第四城真的有如此大的魅力吗?

李白来了，他说：“九天开出一成都，千户万户入画图”。

像画一般的美丽;杜甫来了，他说：“晓看红湿处，花重锦官城”。

这是一座花的城市;陆游来了，他说：“二十里路香不断，青羊宫到浣花溪”。

花香四溢，二十里不断。

怎么样?这就是答案。

成都是一座历史悠久的文明古城。

据史料记载，古属国开明王朝是以陴县定都，到了九世时才牵制成都。

那么这“成都”一名是怎样来得呢?北宋初年，乐史编撰了一部《太平寰宇记》对这个问题作出了解释，按照乐史的说法，成都的得名是根据西周定都的经过，也就是“以周太王从梁山止歧下，一年成邑，二年成集，三年成都，故之名曰成都”。

成都一名沿用至今，2000多年都没有变更过，这在中国地名史上是很少见的。

非常欢迎在座的个位到哈尔滨观光旅游，我是xx旅行社的导游员我的名字是。

为了方便起见大家可以叫我小x.坐在我们车前方的是司机。

师傅有多年的驾驶经验，驾驶技术高超。

所以大家在行车过程中可以完全放心。

我们都说到了吉林是吉(急)开，到了蒙古是蒙(猛)开，到了上海是沪(胡)开，那到了哈尔滨就是黑白两道都能开。

因为在夏天我们的马路是黑色的，到了冬天我们的马路是白色的，所以我们的师傅是黑白两道混得都熟的，大家尽可以放心。

那大家在哈尔滨的这几天将由我和。

师傅陪同大家一同渡过。

哈尔滨是寒冷的，但哈尔滨人是热情的，大家有什么问题尽管和我说，我会尽我最大的努力让大家满意。

现在我们的车窗外是寒冷的，希望大家把过去的一年中不快乐的事和工作上的压力都抛在窗外，让我们的寒冷把它暂时冰冻起来，随着春天的来临悄悄地融化，流入我们的松花江，那留下的只有开心和一年的好运气。

先在这里预祝大家哈尔滨之行愉快，希望大家带着对哈尔滨市的期待和憧憬而来带着对哈尔滨的满意和流连而归!写了欢迎词，就也写个欢送词吧，希望大家多多指教。

那到这里大家的哈尔滨之行就要结束了。

相信中央大街的古典，索菲亚教学的端庄，防洪纪念塔的挺拔，还有冰雪大世界的神奇一定还让您意犹未尽，里道斯红肠。

东方饺子王的饺子一定还在您的唇齿间留香。

如果在此次旅行中您有什么不满意之处还请多多包涵。

小也在这里感谢大家一路上对我工作的支持和理解。

大家对我像朋友一样，大家的热情和友好让我深受感染，我会把大家的这种心态带给更多的人。

也希望我们之间的友情像哈尔滨啤酒一样渊源流长。

这种友情不因时间和空间的距离而减少，只会越来越醇香和绵长。

在离别之际小。

送大家一句话：我们常说因为生活我们不能失去工作，我们努力地工作是为了生活，那反过来我们也不能因为工作失去生活，在您忙碌的工作之余别忘了给自己留一份空间，出来旅行一下，有机会再到哈尔滨来，小和我所在的旅行社将为您提供用更好的服务。

最后祝大家归途一切顺利一路平安!

(一)欢送词的分类欢送词同欢迎词在分类上大致一样，这里不详加说明，只作一简单的列举。

?按表达方式来分可分为现场讲演欢送词和报刊发表欢送词两种。

?按社交的公关性质来分可分为私人交往欢送词和公事往来欢送词两种。

(二)欢送词的特点1.惜别性有句古诗说的好“相见时难别亦难”，中国人重情谊这一千古不变的民族传统精神在今天更显得金贵。

欢送词要表达亲朋远行时的感受，所以依依惜别之情要溢于言表。

当然格调也不可过于低沉。

尤其是公共事务的交往更应把握好分别时所用言辞的分寸。

2.口语性同欢迎词一样，口语性也是欢送词的一个显著特点之一。

遣词造句也应注意使用生活化的语言，使送别既富有情趣又自然得体。

尊敬的邵主任、教委各位领导、xx小学全体同仁：

大家上午好!

在这个“草树知春不久归、百般红紫斗芳菲”的季节里，我们迎来了教委领导和xx小学的李校长及全体同仁，你们不辞辛劳在百忙之中莅临我校指导工作，我谨代表xx小学全体师生向你们的到来表示诚挚的欢迎和崇高的敬意!向多年来一直关心和支持着我校发展的领导表示衷心的感谢!

xx小学坐落在贫瘠的xx高坡上，缺水、少房，但我们还是伴随着清新的泥土味，始终坚持自己的办学方向，全面贯彻落实党的教育方针，在巫溪教委所有领导和各界人士的爱心呵护下，在全体教师的共同努力下，学校管理和谐发展，逐步走向人文、合理、可行、有效，教学研究坚持以校为本，立足实际，大胆尝试。

一边领悟理念的高点，一边琢磨方法的可行，做了一些探索性的工作。

当然，我们要赶上新的要求，还需不断的努力，你们今天的到来将给我们雨露与春风，将给我们前进的动力。

学校现有在校生349人，其中中心校329人中有寄宿生325人。

教职工48人，其中50岁以上教师有21人。

自2011年秋开办寄宿制以来，我们树立“让每个孩子得到最好的发展，让每个家庭享有最大的幸福”的办学理念，坚持以“上好每一节课、善待每一位学生、感动每一位家长”为具体行动，充分利用在校时间对学生进行生活交际教育、感恩教育，依照课程标准开设有乒乓球操、乐和扇子舞、快板、锣鼓、书法、美术、手工、体育、舞蹈、朗读等17个课程辅助活动项目，全面实施减负提质“1+5”行动计划。

加强教师队伍建设，竭力打造学校手工特色品牌，提升学校品位，全面提高xx小学的办学水平和教育教学质量，努力创办家长满意的农村寄宿制学校。

一直以来，学校围绕“明确一条主线(规范化管理，建设精品学校)、把握两个重点(提高教育教学质量，规范师生行为习惯)、实现三个发展(学生主体发展即学生有特长)、教师专业发展即教师有特点、学校内涵发展即学校有品位)、突出四项工作(推进校园文化建设、课程辅助活动的深入开展、提高教师执教能力、构建安全防护体系)，生本与师本并重、减负与提质并举。

我们发挥农村大自然优势在身边找资源，发动学生搜集废旧扑克、纸盒、塑料、石头、树叶、毛线、各类植物的种子等手工制作素材，在教师指导下开展花瓶制作、粘贴、布艺、标本等手工制作活动，并逐步由动手做向做、说、写发展;由单班活动向系列化、复合化发展，努力在普及的基础上提高，培养一批特色教师和特色学生。

而且初步计划到2014年逐步完善并编写以“手工制作”为主题的校本教材，成功构建出具有地域特色的校本课程体系。

(先前展示在各位眼前的手工室部分作品和走廊文化都是我们四至六年级手工组的同学亲手制作的，目前他们正在筹划楼道、餐厅、办公室、学生寝室、院墙等文化)。

一直以来，我们以规范师生的行为习惯为重点，建设亮丽校园。

努力把学校打造成环境优美、干净整洁、师生舒适工作、学习的精神家园。

在这个家园实现三个提高，突出三个理念：一是提高学校管理水平，让每一个学生都拥有成功的机会，形成充满人文关怀、富有激励的管理机制，让师生从“他律”转向“自律”的理念;二是提高教师执教能力，让每一个老师都有创新的舞台，力争使教师全员化站稳讲台，20%的教师成为县乡骨干教师的理念;三是提高课堂教学效益，让每一个家庭都有回报的欢乐，通过各种激励措施，力争教师乐教，学生乐学，向课堂要效益的理念。

一直以来，为了提高教师的执教能力，学校始终有步骤地开展教师培训，完善校本教研制度，致力教师能力的培养，将教师的教学实践与教学研究、校本培训有机融合专业水平，形成“培训、管理、研究”一体化的校本培训运行机制。

学校是一片育人的沃土，桃李春风最知道土地的深情。

我们的老师与时代同行，与学校共成长，与学生共欢乐，与校园共荣辱，老师的心已经靠拢，学校环境已经净化，一种团结和谐的氛围已经形成。

xx小学也就因为我们的老师而美丽。

学校因为中层干部而美丽：就拿本学期来说吧，从开学到现在共有6个周末13天假期，我们全体中层干部仅在第五周的周六和清明假的第二天休息了两天，而且多数时间都是在晚上10点左右才离校。

或许你们都会疑惑，周末了还在学校干什么?用我们教导处邓主任和大队辅导员陈老师的一句话说：是艺术人才干棒棒活。

平整花台、培植花草树木、维修水管、冲洗厕所，只要是校园内需要做的，大家都在做。

我们的陈老师还有一句口头禅就是上厕所就是过跑的。

学校因为老师而美丽。

如果要我列举我们的老师关心爱护学生的一些实例，或许你们会说作为老师都是这么做的。

然而，xx小学的老师却有着别一样的风景：每周一的早上，只要学校车子一停下，到校的老师都会不约而同的帮忙把满满的一车菜抬进库房，就连蜂窝煤，都是我们的老师帮着一个一个的传进屋的;刘会才、王贵清、王洪定老师每两天冲洗厨房;张玲老师车祸后学校建议休息三个月，可一个月后出院就要求上班。

像这样的老师我们学校还有很多很多。

学校因为炊事员而美丽。

由于我们差不多是全住校，所以就餐人数多，炊事员仅3;而教师食堂每天中午都不少于50人，早晚至少也是20人，炊事员仅一个。

他们每天早上5点多就起床，而晚上8点过才收拾完。

清洁卫生做得如何就用不着我说了大家都是有目共睹的。

每餐饭都是保证学生吃饱，从没吃过一顿热乎乎的饭菜。

所以我很庆幸,庆幸遇到了xx小学的全体教职员工，如果没有他们的真情付出就不会有今天的xx小学。

有很多人说我很务实，然而，一所学校不是仅凭一个校长的务实就能搞起来的，但作为校长，我只能默默的把我的老师记在心里，我唯一能回报他们的是用他们的点点滴滴来装扮我们的校园，让xx小学成为他们工作的乐园。

各位领导，各位老师，你们的到来是我们师生的荣幸，你们的指导是我们师生的渴望，诚盼各位领导、老师们对我校工作多提出宝贵意见，把先进的管理理念和宝贵的教学经验留在我校传承，引领和指导今后的工作。

我们坚信，xx小学一定会取得长足有效的发展。

同时，我们期待各位领导、老师们更多的关心和帮助,助推xx小学再上新台阶。

新风明月正当时，凌峰阔步绘新图。

尊敬的朋友们，xx和xx虽然各属一类，相隔着一定的距离，但我相信，随着交往的日益加深，我们双方的手一定会越拉越紧，我们的心一定会越贴越近，我们两所学校的发展一定是越走越好!因为今天，我们两校在教委的指导下在这里共谋教学之计，共悟育人之道，为的是我们两校的共同发展，为的是两所学校的老师共同成长。

同时，xx小学更期待着教委所有领导给我们更多的指导，期待着xx小学李校长一行的真知灼见，我们将虚心接受，坦诚交流。

最后，我代表xx小学祝大家身体健康，工作顺利，阖家幸福!

导游词课件篇10

企业行政管理实务实训指导

指导教师：郑永培

二零零八年八月

模块一：食堂管理训练

第一部分：实训指导

（一）、实训的目的：

本实训教学，通过案例和情景模拟，现场操作，个案分析等不同方法，强化学生的食堂管理的基本知识，真正将理论知识转化为实际操作管理技能。使学生切实认识到管理的重要性和可操作性。强化学生自觉学习涉及食堂管理、食品卫生、营养科学等知识的意识。提高学生的实际管理技能。

（二）、实训的内容：

通过实训的学生现场观摩、实地操作和指导老师、师傅、食堂管理人员的情景示范操作，使学生掌握食堂管理所必须具备的知识技能，熟悉计划管理、价格管理、质量管理、技术管理、卫生管理的方法和策略。理解“民以食为天”的真正含义。强化服务意识，培养勤俭节约的良好习惯。从个人卫生习惯、现代管理理念、人际交往、公关艺术、职业素养等诸方面，全面提高学生今后从业所必备的素质。

（三）实训准备：

1、实训场地：学校1——5学生饭堂、教工餐厅，实训室。

2、物品准备：工作服、工作帽、手套、围裙、调查表、计算器等。

3、必备的样本。(四)、分数评定：

1、实训态度：20分划分为好、较好、一般、较差四个档次。每级级差为5分。

2、实训纪律：20分档次同上。

3、导师评价：20分档次同上。

4、实训作业：40分档次同上。每级级差为10分。

第二部分：训练内容（共五项）

训练

一、职业着装、标准佩戴、个人卫生实操演练

（一）、实训安排实训方式：现场演练

实训地点：实训室或学校餐厅实训目的：

1、养成良好的个人卫生习惯。

2、培养职业场所，举止、着装与环境的协调和谐意识实训要求：

1、注意个人卫生，衣着整洁大方，协调。不披头散发，女生头发应打理美观整齐

2、男生不打赤膊，不戴墨镜，不吸烟。女生不戴戒指，不戴耳钉，不涂脂抹粉，不穿高跟鞋。

3、指甲修剪整齐，不抹指甲油。实训上岗前按操作程序洗头洗手，保持良好的个人卫生（无口臭和异常体味）。

（二）、操作规范

1、个人衣着、标准，符合场景需要（自训，实训的学生相互检查指正）。

2、个人卫生按标准整理，相互检查，现场纠正。

（三）、场景演练

1、按实训要求，任意挑选男女生各一名，让实训的学生评价，挑刺。

2、评价完毕，指导老师或实训主管，根据参加实训的学生的现场表现进行点评加深实训学生的理解和印象。

（四）、实训作业

1、参加实训的学生就《训练一》写一篇个人心得体会要求不少于300字。

训练

二、科学营养配餐

（一）、实训安排

实训地点：实训室或学校餐厅实训方式：现场演练

实训目的:

1、了解熟悉主食类食物的营养物质含量（大米、面粉等主食和主要蔬菜）。

2、实训的学生可以根据食物营养成分，合理配餐。并了解食物的互利和相克性实训要求：

1、了解五种粮食制品的营养成分含量。

2、了解十种主要蔬菜的营养含量及各类肉食类、鱼类、贝类的营养含量。

3、了解常见的十种相克的食物。

（二）、操作规范

1、根据实训的要求，详细了解当季食物、蔬菜的名称、价格、营养价值。

2、按照操作流程合理的清理、洁净食物、蔬菜，最大限度的减少营养流失。

3、经济、营养合理配餐。

（三）、场景演练

1、指导老师或营养师,重点讲解主要食物、蔬菜的营养成分并将不同的品种作比较。

2、现场观摩营养师,如何配餐。

3、以小组为单位，根据经济、营养的要求，模拟配餐。

（四）、作业：

1、按照科学、营养、价廉的原则，配制员工食堂的中餐菜单（要求有十五种以上的菜肴和三种以上的主食，每份菜肴主料不少于两种）文字不限。

训练

三、原材料的采购、验收、领用及制定损耗率

（一）、实训安排

实训地点：学校餐厅及采购现场实训方式：现场演练

实训目的：

1、通过演练强化学生的采购、验收、领用管理意识。

2、了解降低采购成本的途径。

3、了解加强采购管理是搞好价格管理的重要前提。

实训要求：

1、参加实训的学生要真正变身采购管理人员。

2、沉着、镇定面对面与商家讨价还价，据理力争。

3、秉公办事，铁面无私。严格认真的对待每一管理环节。

（二）、操作规范

采购管理：

1、参加实训的学生现场进行采购实践。

2、观摩采购人员如何看货、验质、砍价、成交（重点是辨别真伪）入库管理：

1、按照商品的数量、等级、质量一一验收入库。

2、按照商品的类别、等级、出厂日期、保质期限分别存放，并登记在册。领用管理：

1、领用商品须凭领料单，严格按单发货。

2、按照先进先出的原则把好出库关，避免造成商品积压变质。损耗定额：根据实际耗用情况，按比例核定。

（三）、场景演练

现场辨认；收集准备一些假冒伪劣商品，供参加实训的学生辨认。

模拟演练：将参加实训的学生分为三个小组按采购、验收入库、领用出库等环节进行演练。

损耗核定：设计食堂规模和产成品与原材料的耗用量，测算出合理的损耗定额。

（四）、作业：一个有500人全天进餐的员工食堂（周六、周曰进餐人数按50％计算）请核定每周大约需要粮食、蔬菜、肉食类各多少公斤？（成人按每天需要粮食500克，蔬菜500克，肉类125克计算。小数点后保留一位）。

训练

四、点心制作训练

（一）、实训安排：

实训地点：学校餐厅或实训室实训方式：现场演练实训目的：

1、通过现场示范观摩，能够掌握五种点心的制作方法。，2、掌握上述点心制作的原料配比。

3、能够根据南北方人的口味，安排制作合适的早点。实训要求：

1、按照实战要求，做好个人卫生，并按照程序对实训场所进行消毒。

2、制作的点心色、香、味、形、重量均符合指导点心师的要求。

3、操作完毕按照点心制作间的卫生要求，做好卫生清场工作。

（二）、操作规范：

1、实训前按照要求着装，洗净手、脸，并严格消毒。

2、按照制作程序将所用原材料，一一进行检查核对，按照方便操作的原则顺序排列

3、严格按照原料配比比例和先后顺序进行操作。

（三）、场景演练：

1、指导点心师先行示范，关键处进行重点讲解，实训的学生认真做好笔记。

2、参加实训的学生根据指导点心师的示范，按照标准程序完成制作过程。

（四）、作业：

1、按照训练实际，用文字按操作顺序描述整个点心制作过程。要求文字在300字以上。

训练

五、熟悉加强食堂管理的各项规章制度

（一）、实训安排：

实训地点：学校餐厅、教室或实训室实训方式：现场演练

实训目的：使参加实训的学生了解并熟悉搞好食堂管理所必须建立的规章制度。实训要求：参加实训的学生根据食堂管理的要求，所制定的规章制度必须具备可操作性，且对加强食堂管理有明显的促进作用。

（二）、操作规范：

1、根据食堂工作的流程、岗位制定相应的岗位责任制。

2、按照《食品卫生法》的要求，制定相关的卫生管理制度。

3、制定全面的食堂管理制度。

（三）、场景演练：实训食堂的管理人员现场作各种规章制度的作用和具体执行情况，参加实训的学生边听讲解，边提问，认真作好笔记。

（四）、实训作业：根据课堂所学的食堂管理知识和参加实训的体会，制定一份食堂管理员的职责。

模块

二、园林绿化管理训练

第一部分：实训指导：

（一）、实训的目的：

本实训，通过情景模拟、现场操作、个案分析等不同演练方法，强化参与实训的学生在园林绿化管理方面的基础知识，加深对绿化的作用和意义的认识切实将理论知识转化为实际操作管理技能。为学生今后就业、择业打下较为坚实的实践基础。

（二）、实训内容：

通过学生的实地操作、观摩和指导老师、园林主管的情景示范操作，使学生了解珠三角地区常见植物的品种、名称、习性和栽培方法及经济价值。掌握松土、除草、施肥、修剪、整枝、造型等基本技术，可以操作常见的园林机械,进行小规模的园林绿化景观规划设计。并由指导老师或园林管理人员对规划设计进行演示和讲解。

（三）、实训准备：

1、场地准备：广科院珠海校区中心绿化广场、学生公寓周围绿化带、实验楼内的园林景观。

2、物品准备：

物品

一、各类工具、防护用具（由协作单位，珠海葆力物业公司提供）。物品

二、有关的植物标本和鲜活种苗（大部分自行采集制作或现场指认其余由珠海葆力物业公司提供）。

物品

三、参加实训的学生自行准备与实训场景相适合的服装和遮阳、遮雨用具。

（四）、实训成绩评定：

1、实训态度20分、分为好、较好、一般、较差四个档次每级级差为5分。

2、实训纪律20分、评定同上。

3、导师评价20分、评定同上。

4、实训作业40分、评定同上。但每级级差为10分。

第二部分：训练内容（共六项）

训练

一、了解植物的类别、名称、习性、命名法则。

一、实训的安排：

实训的地点：学校中心绿化广场、实训室或教室实训的方式：现场讲解、演练实训的目的：

1、了解植物如何分类，熟悉珠三角常见植物的名称。

2、了解植物的习性和生长规律，熟悉世界通用的植物命名法则。实训的要求：

1、熟悉三十种常见植物的名称和纲属。

2、能根据植物的习性、形态、生长规律，合理进行栽培和配置。

3、了解植物命名法则的来龙去脉。

二、操作规范：

1、辨别乔木、灌木，区分木本、草本，按种属不同辨认并熟记。

2、根据植物的名称、形态和特点的不同，将其归属为哪一类命名。

三、场景演练：

1、指导老师或园林管理人员根据实训现场的植物栽培现状，和参加实训的学生一起分析管理措施是否适当，若有不当，现场进行解说、点评。

2、在实训的现场将绿篱、色带、园林小品的现在位置，进行模拟变动，再来感觉其视觉效果。

四、实训作业：

1、按照实训的内容，列出二十五种以上的植物名称，并简述各自的习性和栽培要领。

训练

二、植物的栽培和繁殖

一、实训的安排：

实训的地点：学校实训室或校外园林苗圃实训的方式：指导老师讲解及现场演练实训的目的：

1、使参加实训的学生通过现场讲解和实地操作，掌握植物的繁殖和栽培技术。

2、掌握上述技术，使学生今后从事相关职业，操作起来将更加得心应手并可最大限度的节约绿化成本。

实训的要求：

1、实训中严格按指导老师和园林管理人员的要求办事，操作一丝不苟，注重栽培植物的成活率。

2、根据土质、气候、季节的不同，要求实训的学生在栽培管理上懂得采取相应的管理措施。

二、操作规范：

1、根据栽培植物的茎杆高低，根部体积，确定所挖坑穴的大小，深浅。

2、根据土质、气候、季节浇水量和后继补充水的数量。

3、植物繁殖有多种形式，本节仅作嫁接和扦插示范演练。

4、嫁接用砧木和接穗切削面要平滑，砧木切口与接穗要完全吻合。

5、嫁接部位要严密包扎，严防破伤风。

6、扦插用枝条最好选用生长一年以上的粗壮枝条，扦插部位削成平整斜面，特别注意，切勿上下倒置。

三、场景演练：

1、指导老师或园林管理人员现场精心示范和演练。

2、参加实训的学生按示范要求进行实物演练（二人为一组合作完成）。

3、参加实训的学生，相互检查演练成果，最后指导老师进行点评。

四、实训作业：

1、简述三种以上植物的繁殖方法及具体操作中应注意的细节。文字不限。

训练

三、植物的修剪、整枝、造型

一、实训安排：

实训地点：学校中心绿化广场和校外花卉苗木场

实训方式：指导老师讲解，园林管理人员现场示范，学生进行演练实训目的：

1、通过实训，使学生基本掌握各类植物的修剪、整枝和造型技术。

2、经过实训的学生，今后如果从事园林绿化工作，能够根据环境实际，打造和谐怡人的园林景观。

实训要求：

1、草坪推剪平整，无波浪形，无明显遗漏，不伤及草根。

2、绿篱修剪，要求四面平整，坡度一致，交接面无弯曲成直线。

3、整枝造型，不伤主干，所塑造的模型，形象逼真，生趣盎然。

二、操作规范：

1、按照指导老师或园林管理人员的示范操作，正确使用园林器具。

2、操作姿势要正确，修剪从高到低直至草坪。造型从上到下，先左后右顺序进行。

3、绿篱修剪，先平面，再立面，先方角，再圆角。

三、场景演练：

1、以三人为一小组分别进行草坪修剪，绿篱修剪，园林造型的演练。

2、仍以小组为单位相互交流评判。（评判内容包括工具使用是否正确，修剪效果是否理想。）

3、指导老师或园林管理人员现场点评，加深学生的理解，巩固实训效果。

四、实训作业：

1、参加实训的学生，写一篇实训心得体会，200字以上。

训练

四、园林绿化管理中，病虫害的防治

一、实训安排：

实训地点：校园绿化区、实训室或教室实训方式：现场讲解、示范、演练实训目的：

1、了解珠三角地区，常见的园林绿化植物害虫及防治方法。

2、熟悉化学药剂防治、物理防治、生物防治的作用和优缺点。

3、了解常用药剂的理化性质和使用范围。实训要求：

1、掌握各种防治方法的具体操作。

2、熟练掌握施药器具的使用并会简单的维修小故障。

3、能够针对病虫害的危害范围和程度确定相应的防治措施。

二、操作规范：

1、严格按照药剂使用说明书配制药剂。

2、正确操作器具，按照先上后下，先里后外的顺序喷洒药剂。

3、喷洒药剂时，施药人员必须站在上风方向，必要时佩戴防护服和防毒面具。

4、施药时根据植物的生理构造必须喷洒在叶片反面，以增强药效。

三、场景演练：

1、演练时指导老师或园林管理人员配制药剂时，有意将配制比例搞错让学生指出错误并纠正。

2、实训时准备一些植物害虫让学生现场辨认，并指出危害对象及防治措施。

3、施药操作在现场真实演练，学生认真模仿操作。

四、实训作业：

1、实训完毕，根据几种防治方法的不同特点，参加实训的学生一起研讨最佳的害虫防治措施，将研讨结果，形成会议记要,交给指导老师。

训练

五、松土、锄草、施肥、改良土壤实操演练

一、实训安排：

实训地点：校内绿化区域、校外花卉园林场实训方式：;现场讲解、实地操作实训目的：

1、通过实训，了解不同土质对植物生长的影响。

2、了解氮、磷、钾肥对植物不同生长期的影响。

3、基本掌握改良土壤的技巧。实训要求：

1、基本能够辨别土壤的性质。

2、掌握施肥的各种方法，熟悉不同生长期的植物应该施用何种肥料。

3、了解锄草的基本要点和方法。了解除草剂的使用方法。

二、操作规范：

1、根据植物的不同品种，采用适当的施肥方法（土穴点施、叶面喷洒、播种时制成营养铱等）

2、人工锄草的规范要求（不伤及植物又斩草除根）。

3、改良土壤的合理方法与实地操作。

三、场景演练：

1、按照指导老师或园林管理人员的示范，参加实训的学生使用工具人工锄草。

2、参加实训的学生采用不同方法给各种植物施肥。

3、参加实训的学生尝试改良土壤。

四、实训作业：

1、阐述根据肥效的不同，在绿化管理上应该如何合理施用肥料？（要求文字300字以上）。

训练

六、园林绿化规划设计

一、实训安排

实训地点：学校中心绿化广场、教室或实训室实训方式：现场观摩、按比例规划设计实训目的：

1、让参加过实训的学生，能根据课堂学习的知识和实操演练,所掌握的技能，在规划设计中得到应用。

2、通过园林规划设计，进一步提高学生的实际操作技能，使各方面的知识技能得到综合体现。

实训要求：

1、以学校中心绿化广场为蓝本，将广科院张开双臂，以广阔的胸怀迎接四面八方莘莘学子来求学、深造的气势，在设计中展现出来。

2、在规划设计中要求高低错落有致，主题明确，充满人文气息。

二、操作规范：

1、设计中植物要配置合理，形成自然群落，色带、绿篱设置和谐美观。

2、园林小品要蕴含校训“什么什么”之意

3、园林小径设计，要便捷、有序，使人容易产生“书山有路勤为径”的联想。

三、场景演练：

指导老师对学校中心绿化广场，根据“校训”和现有园林小品，植物配置作点评，引导学生加深理解。逐步在赏析中确立自己的设计理念，最终完成规划设计。

四、实训作业：

1、以实训小组为单位，在限定时间内按要求完成上述规划设计。

模块

三、安全与治安管理、消防管理训练

第一部分：实训指导

（一）实训的目的：

本实训，通过案例、情景模拟、顶岗操作、个案分析等多种演练方式，使参加实训的学生能身临其境，运用课堂所学的安全、治安管理知识，从容应对实践演练中的所有问题。启迪学生的主观能动性，强化学生应对突发事件的能力，提高学生的分析判断能力，真正将书本上的理论知识转化为实践操作技能，提高安全、治安管理及消防管理能力。使学生牢固树立“安全第一，预防为主”的思想。

（二）实训的内容：

参加实训的学生在实训场所，一对一顶岗实习，顶岗值班。由学校宣传保卫处选派责任心强，有丰富安全、治安管理经验的同志为指导教官，现场讲解安全、治安管理，消防管理的重要性，介绍哪些为重点部位及怎样对其加强管理。参加实训的学生跟班参加安全检查，消防检查，熟悉怎样查找安全隐患，了解安全隐患整改的全过程。能够独立进行安全值班纪录的填写、整理，起草安全检查报告出具安全隐患整改通知书。了解安全生产，治安管理，消防管理的法律、法规，能够独立处理一般事故和隐患。

（三）实训的准备：

1、实训的场地：学校宣传保卫处管理的各治安岗亭，学校内各个消防设备、消防器材管理场所，安全检查场所等部位。

2、物资准备：安全保卫标准服装（宣传保卫处，不知能否提供）记录本，整改通知书（请学校宣传保卫处提供），记录用笔（自备）。

3、其他检查、排险工具（请学校宣传保卫处支持提供）。

（四）实训成绩评定：

1、实训态度20分：划分为，好、较好、一般、较差四个档次，级差为5分。

2、实训纪律20分：同上

3、导师评价20分：同上

4、实训作业40分：同上，但级差为10分。

第二部分：训练内容（共五项）

训练

一、参与岗位值班

（一）实训安排：

实训地点：学校内各个治安岗亭实训方式：跟班操作演练实训目的：

1、通过顶岗值班，增强纪律观念，磨练意志，锻炼独立工作能力。

2、提高观察人和事务的能力，培养敏锐的观察分析能力。实训要求：

1、按时到岗，按标准要求交接班。

2、顶岗值班时注意力集中，不看书报，不用耳塞听音乐。

3、认真做好值班记录，发现异常立即报告，并作出相应处理。

（二）操作规范：

1、按要求标准着装。

2、值班姿势要求站如松、坐如钟，不打瞌睡，不东张西望。

3、口令、手势，按规范动作标准执行。

4、不脱岗，不离岗，做好记录，按规范交接班。

（三）、情景演练：

1、由有经验的安全保卫管理人员，对岗位值班进行示范演练。

2、演练示范的同时强调需要特别注意的事项和细节。

3、参加实训的学生按要求着装，上岗，执行相关任务，直至办好交接下班。

（四）、实训作业：

1、实训完毕，参加实训的学生，根据实训实践写一篇值班心得体会。要求250字以上。

训练

二、校区巡逻演练

（一）、实训安排：

实训地点：校内教学区、生活区、办公区等需要巡逻的区域。实训方式：现场演练示范巡逻检查的全部内容。实训目的：

1、通过巡逻演练使实训的学生，基本掌握巡逻要点及注意事项。

2、巡逻中容易发现问题，可以锻炼学生应对和处理问题的能力，使综合素质得到提高。

3、提高严格的操作演练，增强学生的警惕性、纪律性。实训要求：

1、参加实训的学生必须严肃认真的对待巡逻检查，不得中途离队脱岗。

2、巡逻中发现问题要及时处理并立即报告，随后认真做好记录。

3、突遇重大险情或事故需沉着冷静，积极参与扑救或追捕，同时按性质报警。，以最佳方式寻求支援或配合。

（二）操作规范：

1、参加实训的学生按要求标准着装，配备警棍或必要的防身自卫器具。

2、按照指导老师或教官的示范或指令，严肃认真的接受并完成任务。

3、要求和安保人员一样，一丝不苟地按巡逻时间、路线、重点部位进行顶岗巡查，并做好巡逻记录。

（三）、情景演练：

1、指导老师或教官，按正常、偶遇、突发，三种情景进行示范演练，讲解。

2、模拟突发案例让学生根据自己的分析和判断，采取相应的措施并报警。

3、正常巡逻，发现熟悉的同学有违规、违纪行为，应如何处理。

（四）、实训作业：

1、根据实训演练的情况制定一份校区或厂区巡逻检查制度。文字不限。

训练

三、安全检查、消防检查演练

（一）、实训安排：

实训地点：校区内各个需要进行检查的区域或部位。实训方式：跟班顶岗检查演练。实训的目的;

1、通过参加安全检查、消防检查使学生掌握安全检查、消防检查的程序。了解何谓重点部位，及对重点部位加强管理的相应措施。

2、通过检查演练使学生切实理解“安全第一”、“安全就是效益”的重要性，它并不只是口号，而应是每个人，每个企业、机关、学校自觉的行动。

实训的要求：

1、认真参加各项检查，熟悉检查的程序、内容、重点部位。

2、注意观察检查的全过程和方法，从中发现有无需要改进的地方。

3、认真细致的做好检查记录利于总结和提高。

（二）、操作规范：

1、按照任务分配，认真履行检查职责，不放过一处隐患。

2、检查与整改并举，切实做到隐患整改不过夜。

3、严格检查，详细记载，如实汇报并认真填写隐患整改通知书。

（三）、情景演练:

1、指导老师或安全检查负责人，根据检查项目分配任务，确定各检查项目人员，并作示范演练，提出具体要求。

2、事先在某个环节（不会造成影响的地方）设置一些小问题，让参加实训的学生去检查发现。

3、参加实训的学生参与检查全过程，包括检查后的总结会，参加实训的学生畅谈自己的感受和建议。

（四）、实训作业：

1、绘制一份用电安全检查表，再自设,检查发现的问题，并根据这些问题出具一份隐患整改通知书。文字不限。

训练

四、消防演练（1）废麻袋扑灭初期火险

（一）实训安排

实训地点：校内合适的区域。

实训方式：实训指导老师或消防教官先作示范，学生再按要求进行操作演练。实训目的：

1、使学生通过本演练，基本掌握扑灭初期火险的技能。

2、通过实训演练，锻炼学生临危不乱的良好心理素质。

3、掌握使用简易器具，扑灭初期火险的方法。实训要求：

1、沉着、冷静、临危不乱，行动敏捷。

2、在规定的区域，以最快速度扑灭明火。

（二）、操作规范：

1、按照口令所用的三条麻袋必须全部浸湿，一次拎起，快速奔向火点。

2、湿麻袋在火点上，呈三角状交叉压叠。

3、明火压灭，迅速跑回原点。

（三）、情景演练：

1、指导老师或消防教官，做示范操作并讲述要点。

2、学生根据示范动作，做扑救演练。

3、指导老师或消防教官根据电源起火、油类起火、气体起火、其他起火，介绍不同的扑救方式和合适的灭火器具。

4、演练物资准备，另列清单。

（四）、本次演练无作业，以演练成绩作为作业成绩。

训练

五、消防演练（2）铺设消防水在龙带

一、实训安排：

实训地点：校区内合适的区域实训方式：同消防演练（2）实训目的：

1、通过实训，锻炼学生的反应速度和实战能力。

2、锻炼学生全身各个部位的协调性。

3、为学生今后成为企业员工奠定一定的消防技能。实训要求：

1、在最短时间内，甩出第一盘水龙带，要求平整。

2、按标准姿势，拎起第二盘水龙带以最快速度与第一盘水龙带迅速接好再接上水枪，迅速回到原点。

二、实训规范：

1、要求姿势正确，奔跑迅速，甩带,平直，不缠叠。

2、水龙带接口通水后，不会断开，不漏水。

3、水枪要准确指向模拟火堆。

三、情景演练：

1、指导老师或消防教官按规范动作，作示范，并讲解注意事项。

2、参加实训的学生根据示范动作和具体要求，进行现场演练并计时。

3、演练中，指导老师或消防教官，发现问题随时点评，纠正。保证演练达到预期效果。

4、演练物资准备，另列清单。

四、实训作业：同消防演练（1）。

模块

四、会务管理实践训练

第一部分：实训指导

实训目的：

通过本模块的实训教学，我们采用情景模拟、现场演练等训练方法，使参加实训的学生，在实情实景的现实环境和气氛中，了解操办一次重要会议所要做的基本工作。强化学生的会议组织与管理知识，并将理论知识转化为实际操作技能。使学生对会务管理工作有一个全面、清晰的认识，并能够模拟进行一次重要会议的操办过程。

实训内容：

1、会前准备：

拟定会议议程，会议日期，确定出席会议人员，拟发会议通知，起草会议文件（包括开幕词、会议主题报告、领导讲话、闭幕词。若是表彰会还包括表彰名单，颁奖仪式，先进代表发言等）制作会议证件，联系通知新闻单位，安排安全保卫工作，布置会场，若会期较长还应准备安排会议代表食宿。提供医务服务。

2、会中服务：会议签到，（分为，薄式签到、卡式签到、电子签到）提供会议服务，做好会议记录，编写会议简报和新闻报道，制作和分放会议代表通信录，安排好会议间文化娱乐活动，组织参观访问等工作。

3、会后工作：

清理会场，远道会议代表要安排车辆送站，清理会议文件，整理会议记录，形成并印发会议记要，进行会议总结。

实训准备：

1、场地：实训室或教室

2、物品：会议桌椅，电脑，音响，摄影、投影设备，必须的办公用品。

第二部分：实践训练：

训练

一、会议准备工作演练

一、实训安排：

实训地点：实训室或教室实训方式：实战演练实训目的：

1、让学生意识到会议筹备工作的重要性。

2、能够做好会议召开前的准备工作。实训要求：20分

1、会议材料准备的规范、完整。

2、会场布置得当。

3、涉外事务组织的无可挑剔。

4、会议生活安排的周到、细致、可行。

二、操作规范：30分

1、会议名称和所有会议文件必须使用确切、规范的文字和格式。

2、召开筹备会议，确定会议名称、议题、召开时间、主持人、与会人员、闭幕时间。

3、成立会务工作机构。

4、制定会议计划和会议经费预算，制作会议证件，发布会议通知。

5、准备会议材料及会议所需物品。布置会场。

三、场景演练：50分

1、一家大型企业集团准备召集各子公司高层领导，进行明年经营战略调整方面问题的探讨，会议时间定在2008年12月8日召开，会期二天，你作为集团公司行政

工作人员，将怎样为这次会议一个比较周密的安排和准备。

训练

二、会议进行时所做工作的演练

一、实训安排实训地点：同上实训方式：同上实训目的：

1、通过实训，使学生熟悉会议召开期间，所要进行的工作。

2、特别是如遇突发事件能够冷静、果断妥善处理。

3、通过周到的服务，使会议获得圆满成功。实训要求：

1、做好会议的报到工作，随时注意报到情况，切勿遗漏应到会的重要人士，如发生这种情况，应采取补救措施，通知其前来参会。

2、做好会场引导工作，主要与会人员座位前，应设置醒目的姓名牌。

3、做好各种服务工作。

二、操作规范：40分

会务工作人员按分工做好下列工作：

1、与会人员报到时，要查验证件，如实登记接收与会者带来的材料，发放会议材料，预收会务费用。

2、会务工作人员为与会者指引会场位置（与会人员较少时，应送上茶水），并介绍展区、吸烟区、洗手间的位置。

3、做好安全保卫和保密工作，安排好会议交通服务。

4、安排好茶水供应，根据会议进程，做好拍照和摄像服务。

5、注意在会议进行期间为领导和讲话者续添茶水。

6、准确、完整，要点齐全的做好会议记录。

7、印制并分发会议代表通信录及会议代表合影照。

8、做好会议期间的餐饮服务，并及时订购回程票。

三、场景演练：60分

1、宏远公司准备召开一次订货会议，邀请出席会议的嘉宾为省内外新老客户，会期三天，时间定在2008年11月6日至11月8日，地点定在珠海度假村大酒店。请规范要求做好会议进行期间的各项工作。

训练

三、会议结束时所做工作的演练

一、实训安排：实训地点：同上实训方式：同上实训目的：

1、通过实训，使学生熟悉会议结束时，所要做的工作。

2、通过这些工作，使学生知道会议结束时的服务工作更为重要，能够给客人留下美好的印象和记忆，为企业今后拓展业务打下良好的基础。

实训要求：

1、做好送别会议代表的工作，做到热情、有礼。

2、做好会场的善后工作，若是租借的会场更要做好这方面的工作。

3、整理好应归档的会议材料和会议文件，印发会议纪要。

4、总结会议服务工作。

二、操作规范：50分

1、送别会议代表前，应结清会议费用。

2、安排人员和车辆送站。

3、清理会场，归还所借物品。

4、结清会议开支费用。

5、整理会议记录，形成会议记要，收齐会议材料，汇编会议文件，分类、归档。

三、场景演练：50分

1、宏远公司订货会议圆满结束。会务工作人员按规范要求进行善后工作。

模块

五、企业文化建设实践训练

第一部分：实训指导

实训的目的：

通过实训演练，使学生知道企业文化，作为企业行政体系的重要组成部分，随着企业的发展而不断地丰富内容，它的存在不以人的意志为转移。企业文化，就好比是企业的秉性，如果企业从一开始没有养成一个好秉性，那企业成长壮大后必然会面临“江山易改，秉性难移”的困境。久而久之将严重困扰企业的健康发展，所以现代企业都十分重视企业行政文化的建设。企业行政文化包括企业的行政意识、行政道德、行政心理、行政习惯、行政精神，价值观等等。搞好企业行政文化建设必须从微观抓起，点滴积累，逐渐形成精深厚重的企业文化。

实训的内容：

（一）、企业行政文化建设的原则：

1、目标原则：

企业行政组织的活动是围绕目标展开的，企业行政文化作为企业行政组织活动在精神观念上的反映，也必须把这一目标体现出来，使每一位组织成员的观念、意识、意志与这一目标紧密联系，以激发其工作积极性。

2、价值原则：

企业行政文化体现组织的共同价值观，体现全体员工的共同信仰、行为准则和道德规范。这些都有赖于有意识的引导、培养，有赖于选择有意义的，能促进企业行政活动绩效的价值因素作为共同的规范依据。

3、创新原则：

行政组织要保持活力，不断开拓进取，就必须培养创新精神，这样组织才会不断发展。

4、参与原则：现代企业组织，其企业文化建设要让全体成员参加其决策和管理，增进上下级之间的信息交流，以促进各方面工作的积极性。

5、以人为本的原则：

企业行政文化建设要凸现人本主义精神，企业行政文化建设的主体是人，人是考虑一切问题的根本出发点。企业的发展，企业的未来必须依靠人，其前途和命运也由人来决定，来左右。简而言之，“人是决定一切的“。

（二）、企业行政文化建设的途径：

1、选择、确立企业的价值标准：

（1）企业行政文化建设要凸现企业特色，充分考虑企业间企业文化的差异性，同时还注意要符合特定的时代特征。

（2）、企业价值标准要正确、明晰、科学，具有鲜明的特点。（3）、企业价值观与企业行政文化要体现组织的旨管理战略和发展方向。（4）、要考虑员工的认可程度和接纳程度，使之和员工的基本素质相吻合，过高或过低难于奏

2、企业领导率先垂范：（1）、企业领导是企业文化的塑造者，对企业文化的创立具有重要的作用，企业领导通过自己的垂范作用，引导员工的行为和思想倾向。

（2）、企业领导是企业文化的管理者，企业领导通过对企业目标、企业价值观、企业道德、企业制度等的修订和管理来实现对企业文化的管理。

（3）、企业领导是企业文化的变革者，企业领导根据企业的实际情况，结合其对市场形势的判断，来作出企业文化变革的决定。

3、从制度层面建构企业文化：（1）、组织管理制度，主要包括企业内部的决策制度、人事制度、民主管理制度

等。

（2）、经营管理制度，主要包括各种管理标准、管理程序、管理岗位的划分、相关的奖惩制度等。

（3）、精神文明制度，精神文明建设是一个循序渐进的过程，是企业员工思想、道德、文化等素质全面提高的过程。同时，精神文明建设必须随着时代和社会的发展而进步。

4、从教育层面构建企业文化：（1）、对员工进行企业文化意识教育，由于企业员工来自五湖四海，受教育程度，思想境界，思维能力，个人习惯，各不相同。企业的价值观、企业哲学、企业道德等，都需要通过教育才能灌输到员工的头脑之中，成为员工自觉指导自己行为的准则。

（2）、对员工进行行为教育，良好的企业文化包含着良好的员工行为，对员工进行行为教育，其对象包括对企业领导的行为，对企业模范人物的行为，企业员工的个体和群体的行为等。

（3）、对员工进行科学技术的教育，现代企业的生产需要应用大量的先进科学技术，而先进的科学技术的应用离不开员工的科学文化素质的提高。企业科学技术教育的途径有学历教育和非学历教育，前者主要是对员工进行系统地科学技术知识的充电，而后者主要是有针对性地对员工进行科学技术的短期培训。

5、丰富和发展企业文化，任何一种企业文化都是特定的历史产物，当企业的内外部条件发生变化时，不失时机地调整、更新、丰富和发展企业文化的内容和形式，这既是一个不断淘汰旧文化和不断生成新文化的过程，也是一个认识与实践不断深化的过程，企业文化由此经过循环往复达到更新、更高的层次。

第二部分：实践训练（重点演练企业文化的行为规范部分和公共关系礼仪部分）

（一）行为规范演练：

1、企业员工通用的行为规范：

（1）仪表行为规范，包括着装洁，佩戴大方，举止端庄，说话和气，待人诚恳，态度热情，语言文明，讲究礼貌等。

(2)、人际关系行为规范，包括注意礼节，文明称呼；与人共事，宽厚豁达；团结友爱，相互帮助；恪守信用，言行一致等。

（3）、员工目标行为规范，包括勤奋学习，不断进取；忠于职守；热情工作，乐于奉献等。

（4）、遵章守纪行为规范，包括听从指挥，服从安排；守法守规，不谋私利等。（5）、群体意识行为规范，包括大局为重，维护群体；关心集体，发挥特长等。

2、企业的专业岗位行为规范：（1）、生产管理岗位行为规范，包括生产调度人员、产品质量管理人员、安全生产管理人员行为规范等。

（2）、科技管理岗位行为规范，包括新产品开发管理，科学研究管理、技术开发管理、科技情报管理、工程建设管理行为规范等。

（3）、物质管理岗位行为规范，包括物资供应管理、产品销售管理行为规范等。（4）、财务管理岗位行为规范，包括固定资金管理、流动资金管理行为规范，成本管理岗位行为规范，销售收入和利润管理行为规范等。

（5）、劳动人事管理岗位行为规范，包括劳动组织、劳动工资管理、社会保险和员工福利管理、干部教育、调配、任用管理行为规范等。

（6）、行政工作岗位行为规范，包括企业党委工作人员、企业行政工作人员、企业群众团体组织工作人员行为规范等。

（7）、生产岗位行为规范，包括班前准备、生产操作、巡回检查、生产安全、设备维护、辅助生产岗位行为规范等。

（8）、企业服务岗位行为规范，包括企业生活服务人员、企业社会服务人员、企

业生产服务人员行为规范等

（二）、公共关系礼仪演练：

1、一般礼仪，如待人诚恳热情，尊重对方，守时守规守信用等。

2、着装礼仪，在商务交往和日常业务活动中应注重服饰，着装要整洁、大方、入时得体。

3、会谈礼仪，应当讲究初识介绍、握手问候、交换名片等见面时的礼节。

4、签字礼仪，举行签字仪式，要做好文本定稿、翻译、座次顺序安排；助签人员的翻揭、指签、传递等环节要有章有序。

5、文书礼仪，体现在启示、留言、请柬、信件、电文、合同、协议等方面的行文格式、和语气上。

6、礼品礼仪，赠送礼品在于表达和增进友谊，一般应选择有特色、有意义的礼品；不能重物轻值。

三、操作演练：（示范操作）

1、仪表行为规范。

2、人际关系行为规范。

3、公共关系礼仪。

四、实训作业：实训演练时，在上述各项中随机挑选。

导游词课件篇11

球童实训课教案

（一）

一、教学任务：

（一）了解高尔夫运动的基础理论、礼仪、规则等专业知识。

（二）掌握球童服务的基础知识、礼貌规范、工作流程及服务技巧。

（三）培养学生不怕吃苦、团结协作的实干精神，讲文明、讲礼貌、守纪律，坚持虚心好学的严谨作风。

二、教学目的：

（一）通过高球基础理论教学，强化学生的专业知识，扩展认知的宽度，加深理解的深度。

（二）通过球童实训教学，让球童全面掌握球童服务的基础知识、礼貌规范、工作流程及服务技巧，今后能胜任球童和培训球童的相关工作。(三)通过实训教学，让球童价值和待遇提高。

三、教学资料

熟练驾驶球车服务球车服务程序中的注意事项 > 电瓶车服务过程中，最需要强调的便是：球童互动，节奏，准确性和安全意识，并且要懂得用“心”服务。>

一、球童互动

> 电瓶车服务当中配合要放在第一位，有了好的配合服务起来就轻松多了，电瓶车服务尤为体现了这一点。一般一辆电瓶车上有两名球童服务两位客人，在这种情况下，每一个球童在服务中就相当于一对二的球童服务了，也就是有的时侯一名球童要同时照顾两个客人。

> 例1：球童甲、乙出场服务客人，在球道中，甲客人的球偏至隔壁球道，乙客人的球位却非常好，当乙客人打完球后，乙球童就可以将车开至果岭附近，在开车的过程中，乙球童要随时观察甲球童服务的客人将球打至什么位置，并考虑甲客人需不需要换球杆；甲客人需要换球杆时，甲球童可以给乙球童作个手势，请乙球童帮忙把球杆送来。果岭上乙球童就可将两位客人的推杆同时拿上果岭。> 例2：发球台上，甲服务的客人首先开球，之后甲球童就可以在全组客人开完球后将球杆全部收回，并清理干净，乙球童此时就要处理发球台上的善后工作，例如：补沙，清理垃圾。> 例3：球童甲、乙出场，两名客人的球位置基本相同，在两名客人打完球之后，离球车比较近的甲球便可以将两名客人的球杆收回招呼客人上车，而此时的乙球童便可以处理善后工作，例如：铺沙、平整沙坑等等，之后迅速跑到下一落球点。而甲球童与两位客人提前来到下一落球点后，便可以根据球位置的情况为两名客人挑选球杆。>

二、节奏

> 球车服务主要体现的便是快捷，所以，球童除了在果岭上的时间外基本上都是在跑着服务。> 球道中，如为客人挑选球杆有误的情况下，球童应迅速跑到电瓶车上为客人取杆，同时同客人道歉。> 在一般情况下，球童在补沙或处理球道中的一些善后的工作，这时客人是不会开车先走的，球童应迅速将工作做完，之后马上跑到电瓶车上等待客人开车。>

三、准确性

> 准确性主要是指为客人选杆、报码数、目测等方面。发球杆对于我们来说都能很好的判断，主要是球道中球杆的选择。首先，球童要十分熟悉球道中的情况，当球打出后，球童在车上就要计算出球停点到果岭或障碍区的距离（上下的误差不能相差5码）。接下来要根据球位置的实际情况为客人挑选球杆，每次至少拿上3支球杆供客人选择，而这3支球杆中里面至少要有一支是客人要用的球杆。> 好的球童不仅能照顾自己客人拿杆，还可以为同组的客人挑选球杆。经验丰富的球童可以在客人打完几个洞之后了解自己客人打球的战略战术，在客人发完球后，可以一次性的将客人打完整条道的球杆全部带好（因为有的客人喜欢步行打球，此时的球童也只能服务在其左右）。

> 在比赛时，球童如确实没有把握为客人选杆，要在客人停车的同时，准确的为客人介绍球位置的所在情况，请客人挑选球杆。而在果岭附近不要只拿P杆和推杆，还要拿上S杆，因为万一你客人的球不小心进入沙坑，你就麻烦了！>

四、电瓶车上的安全问题 > 在电瓶车服务当中，我们不仅要注意与前组之间的安全问题，还要注意自身的安全，在我们强调打球节奏的同时，也要注意电瓶车上的安全。> 来场的客人习惯开快车，在开电瓶车时车速也会非常快，往往会忽略站在车后面的球童，这时就要靠我们自己来保护自己了。

> 例1：在球童处理善后工作时，有时客人只注意你向车的方向走来，并没有注意你是否已经安全的站好，这时，你就要提醒客人“请稍等”，同时马上上车，而同车的球童应伸出手来挽紧刚刚上车的球童，之后给客人一个信号“OK！我们可以开车了”。

> 例2：电瓶车在停车的时候是没有什么特殊的信号，有时经常会出现，前面的电瓶车已经停车，而后面的电瓶车因行驶的速度太快，而来不及刹车，导致两辆车撞在一次的交通事故。在这种情况下，球童会在慌乱之中从车上跳下来，而被撞到小腿上。为了避免类似事件的发生，首先，要提醒客人不要将车开的太快，另外球童在下车时，要养成从电瓶车踏板的两侧下车的习惯，这样，及时出现撞车的情况，球童也不会受到伤害。

> 例3：在阴雨天气，路面很滑，开车更是要格外小心，应提醒客人“先生，路面比较滑，我们稍微开慢一点，谢谢！”。在转弯处和比较陡的斜坡处，球童应抓紧扶手，以免从车上甩出去。如遇上危险的情况下，千万不要慌张，跳车时记得跳向草地的方向。> 例4：客人当中，有一部分客人不会开车（女士、儿童较多），此时球童就不仅是服务生，还要兼职做司机，但千万不要让没有驾车经验的客人或儿童开车，以免发生不愉快的事情。>

五、用“心”服务

> 做任何事情都要动脑筋，灵活运用所学的东西，服务中要用“心”去观察，用“心”去服务。

> 一般来场的客人以会员为主，基本上每一位会员球童都要至少服务一次，所以，我们要将每次所服务客人习惯牢记于心，例如，张先生习惯果岭边上用S杆，李先生发球时喜欢用3号木等等，在下一次服务这两位先生的时侯，不用客人说你可以很快的帮他选杆，这会让他感觉到你每一次都是在用心的为他服务。

> 在服务当中，球童最好在客人打完两、三个洞之后，便了解客人的用杆习惯，当客人的球打出去后，我们首先要看清楚球的停点，在车行驶的过程中要注意观察球停点所在位置的具体情况，例如：球距离下一落球点或果岭还有多少码？是顺风、逆风？旗洞的位置？等等；在根据客人打球的水平为客人挑选球杆，建议初学打球的客人或第一次来场的客人应如何打。为客人提供更准确、更详细的建议。

> 学会关心客人。天气炎热的夏天，如果你及时的将饮料送到客人手里，你想，客人的感觉是什么呢？此时的他才会真正感觉到你是出自真心的为他服务，就是在炎热的天气有你陪伴也是很凉爽的。同时也可以给初学打球的客人一些关于球技和高尔夫礼仪方面的建议，但一定要适可而止，不要让客人有“喧宾夺主”的感觉。

? 要用心的去观察自己的客人，例如，有些客人来场是为了锻炼身体，习惯步行打球，往往忘记开车，这时球童就要认真观察，在服务中如客人没有开车的意识，球童就应及时将球车开至落球点，另外留下一名球童陪在客人身旁，以便随时为客人提供服务。在有些洞的果岭附近，球童可根据情况将电瓶车开至下一洞发球台；或提前将电瓶车开至离下一洞比较近的地方等候客人上车。

四、教学总结：

1．课堂考勤：

2．课堂小结：球场特色

3．课后任务：去球场实地观察

五、课后小结：

本文来源: http://www.dg15.com/a/6027352.html

上一篇：小学作文100字

下一篇：校园安全口号标语大全集汇总

"高一英语课件"延伸阅读

大学库课件(精品十五篇) 教案课件是我们老师的一项重要职责，因此每天老师都会按时按质地编写好教案课件。教案对于实现课程教学目标起着重要的保障作用。如果您正在寻找“大学库课件”相关内容，请查看下面的推荐，建议收藏此页以备后续查阅所需！...

2023.11.21 大学课件

五上语文课件精品工作总结之家在阅读“五上语文课件”这篇文章时，发现里面有很多有益的提示和建议，建议大家把它收藏起来，并分享给朋友们。对于教师而言，编写教案和课件是必不可少的任务之一。因此，在编写过程中，不要草草了事，因为教案是课堂教学流程的规范化表现。...